RMAD-BHGAVATA VIDYPTHAM

ADDRESS: S-1, 97, SECTOR 4, CAITANYA VIHAR PHASE 2, VRINDAVAN, MATHURA DISTRICT, UP,
INDIA, 281502

Prayuktkhyta-
majar
r-rdh-govinda-devau
jayatm

Conten
ts
Introduction..............................................................................................................................................x

Prathama ka...........................................................................................................................x
1.1.............................................................................................. bhva-vikra-varga
............................................................................................................................................................x
1.2........................................................................................................ buddhi-varga
............................................................................................................................................................x
Dvitya ka.................................................................................................................................x
2.1manuya-ce-varga.............................................................................................................x
2.2brahma-ce-varga................................................................................................................x
2.3katriya-ce-varga...............................................................................................................x
2.4vaiya-ce-varga...................................................................................................................x
2.5dra-ce-varga....................................................................................................................x

Ttya ka....................................................................................................................................x
3.1.................................................................................................... prakra-varga
x
3.2....................................................................................................... san-di-varga
x
 3.4 akarmaka-dhtava...................................................................................................................x

Table of corrections..........................................................................................................................x

Introductio
n
rla Rpa Gosvm wrote Prayuktkhyta-majar by summarizing khyta-candrik,
a book on verbs written by Bhaa Malla. Sometimes, Rpa Gosvm copied khyta-
candrik, and in some sections he added things that arent in khyta-candrik. Jva
Gosvm quotes khyta-candrik in vtti 294.

In Prayuktkhyta-majar, verbs sharing a particular meaning are grouped together,

and a nma ending in a saptam viubhakti is used to indicate their sense. This nma
1
is in bold in the text . But in the third section (nnrtha-varga) of the third chapter,
this system is reversed: various nmas in a
saptam viubhakti indicate the various meanings of a verb, which is in bold.
In this edition our format is: First all the verses and the word-for-word synonyms for a
section are given together in one chunk and immediately after that the translations of
the verses are given together in once chunk. In the translation each meaning is
numbered. This number refers to the verse in which the meaning is found. Sometimes
the verbs linked to that meaning may encompass several verses.

Often, two or more groups of verbs are compacted together in one verse. The author
uses a specific system to make the reader understand when each group starts and
stops. The rule is: tu signifies the end of a definition, and atha denotes the start of a
new one. However, the word tu cannot be used at
2
the beginning of a line . The earliest position it can occupy is that of the second word.
This can lead
to confusion as sometimes a verb belonging to the next group is used as the first word
A few grammatical points have to be kept in mind while studying Prayuktkhyta-
majar. Firstly, many dhtus presented herein are not in Jva Gosvms Dhtu-pha.
3
They can be found in Pinis Dhtu-pha . Moreover some of the cur-di-dhtus that
are listed as parapad and so on in Jva
Gosvms Dhtu-pha are listed as ubhayapad in the Pinian Dhtu-pha. This is
because the Pinians consider that all of the cur-di-dhtus are in effect ubhayapad
Secondly, upendras may modify the status of a dhtu as sa-karmaka or akarmaka. The
references are provided in the footnotes. In general, other types of variations of verb
conjugations are sourced in the word-for-word.

Thirdly, regarding the distiction between sa-karmaka and akarmaka dhtus, when this
differentiation is confusing, we have supplied the words transitive and intransitive
respectively in the translation.
For further details concerning akarmaka dhtus, one may refer to the list given in
Prayuktkhyta- majar 3.4.3-8, or to vtti 292.

1
Sometimes the meaning of a group of verbs is not written in the text. In such rare cases, we supply
the meaning in the translation but we do not add the equivalent Sanskrit word.
2
See tv-antthdi na prva-bhk (Amara-koa, prathama ka, paribh-prakaraa 5; or 1.1.5
in other versions).
3
In this regard, we also consulted Bhad-dhtu-kusumkara and Mdhavy dhtu-vtti.
Fourthly, whichever usage is seen with khytas also applies for kdantas. For example,
ur-ktya and
ur-karoti (He accepts, agrees) have the same sense.
It is also important to remember that a viujana of the rudh-dis may optionally be
deleted. Thus runddhe can also be written rundhe, vintte can be written vinte, and so on
4
. khyta-candrik and Prayuktkhyta-majar consistently use the second option. For
the sake of clarity, we follow the text
in the word-for-word but, in the translation, we use the first option.
Our source text is Haridsa strs edition of Prayuktkhyta-majar. Many
typographical mistakes were corrected, mostly by consulting khyta-candrik. A
comparative list of changes is included herein. In this regard, in the third section
(nnrtha-varga) of the third chapter, Rpa Gosvm lists the sv-dis after the tad-
dis, and the rudh-dis after the tan-dis. This is in accordance with khyta- candrik.
However, so as to avoid confusion, we have presented the classes of dhtus according
to their standard order.
Moreover, the number of sections (vargas) in khyta-candrik and Prayuktkhyta-
majar is the same. The names of these sections are identical also, except for the last
one, which is mutually exclusive. Bhaa Malla entitles his last section tmanepada-
parasmaipada-varga whereas Rpa Gosvm calls his last section Akarmaka-
dhtava. Overall, Rpa Gosvm significantly improved upon khyta-candrik.

rpa-jva-gosvmibhy
nama

Prathama
ka

1.1.1
bhaa-mallair viracit ydbhutkhyta-
candrik tata saghyate prya prayukto
dhtu-sacaya
bhaa-mallaiby Bhaa-malla; viracitcomposed; y which; adbhuta
wonderful; khyta- candrik the book khyta-candrik; tatafrom that;
saghyateis compiled; pryamostly; prayuktain current usage; dhtu-sacaya
a collection of verbs.

1.1.2
sattym asti bhavati vidyate ctha
janmani
utpadyate jyate ca sambhavaty
sattymin the sense of being, existing; astias[a] bhuvi (2P); bhavatibh
sattym (1P); vidyatevid[a] sattym (4A): caand; athastart of a meaning;
janmaniin the sense of taking birth; utpadyateud + pad[a] gatau (4A); jyate
jan[] prdur-bhve (4A); caand; sambhavati sam + bh sattym (1P); udbhavati
ud + bh sattym (1P); apialso.
1.1.3
akurdy-udbhave prya prarohati
virohati nipadyate phalati ca
siddhau sidhyati rdhyati
4
In this regard, the stra is: viujand viudsasydarana sa-varge viudse: A
viudsa that comes after a
akura-di-udbhavein the sense of the appearance of a sprout and so on; prya
generally; prarohatipra + ruh[a] janmani prdur-bhve ca (1P); virohativi + ruh[a]
janmani prdur-bhve ca (1P); nipadyatenir + pad[a] gatau (4A); phalatiphal[a]
nipattau (1P); caand; siddhauin the sense of being accomplished; sdhyati
sdh[a] sasiddhau (4P); sidhyatiidh[u] sarddhau (4P).

1.1.4
nirvartate ca pactha sthitau vasati
tihati vartate nivasaty ste
dhriyate cvatihate
nirvartate nir + vt[u] vartane (1A); caand; pacathe five verbs; athastart of a
meaning; sthitauin the sense of staying, abiding; vasativas[a] nivse(1P); tihati
h gati-nivttau (1P); vartatevt[u] vartane (1A); nivasatini + vas[a] nivse(1P);
stes[a] upaveane vidyamnaty ca (1A); dhriyate dh[] avasthne (6A) by 426
and 381; caand; avatihateava + h gati- nivttau (1P).

1.1.5
jvati vasiti prity rjayaty api jvane
syt pratyujjvati-pada punar-jvana-
vcakam
jvatijv[a] pra-dhrae (1P); vasitivas[a] prane (2P); pritipra +
an[a] prane
(2P); rjayatirj[a] bala-prayor dhrae (10P); apialso; jvanein the sense of
living; sytis; pratyujjvati-padamthe word pratyujjvati (prati + ud + jv[a] pra-

1.1.6
pravasity api nivse tath
nivasitty api
parime pariamaty tmane pi
pravasitipra + vas[a] prane (2P); apialso; nivsein the sense of breathing;
tathand; nivasitini + vas[a] prane (2P); itithus; apialso; parimein
the sense of transforming; pariamatipari + am[a] prahvatve abde ca (1P);
tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; vivartatevi + vt[u] vartane (1A).

1.1.7
sampadyate kalpate tha vddhau bhati
vardhate vipolaty edhate sthlayate
puyati ceti a
sampadyatesam + pad[a] gatau (4A); kalpatekp[] smarthye (1A); athastart of
a meaning; vddhauin the sense of increasing, expanding; bhatibh[i] vddhau
(1P); vardhatevdh[u] vddhau (1A); vipolativi + pul[a] mahattve (1P); edhate
edh[a] vddhau (1A); sthlayatesthla paribhane (10A); puyatipu[a] puau
(4P); caand; itithus; athe six verbs.
1.1.8
vddhi-bhede samddhy-khye
samdhyati mahyate pyyate sphyate ca
kramate prathate pi ca
vddhi-bhedein the sense of the particular kind of increasing; samddhy-khye
which is called prosperity; samdhyatisam + dh[u] vddhau (4P); mahyate
mah[] pjym (kav-di); pyyate[] + pyai[] vddhau (1A), or [] +
[o]pyy[] vddhau (1A); sphyatesphy[] vddhau (1A); caand; kramate
kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P); rathateprath[a] prakhyne (1A); apialso; caand.
1.1.9
dhyaty dhnoti ca tath pryate ca nava
kriy
vddhau tu sa-vikry vayaty
dhyatidh[u] vddhau (4P); dhnotidh[u] vddhau (5P); caand; tath
moreover; pryate pr[] pyyane (4A); caand; navanine; kriyverbs;
vddhauin the sense of increasing, expanding; tuend of a meaning; sa-
vikrymin the sense of changing while increasing; vayati [u][o]vi gati-
vddhyo (1P); ucchrayatiud + ri[] sevym (1U); itithus; ubhethe two
1.1.10
sphuati sphoate phullaty unmlaty api
pupyati vijmbhate vikacate vikse

sphuatisphu[a] visarae (6P); sphoatesphu[a] vikasane (1A); phullatiphull[a]

vikasane (1P); unmlatiud + ml[a] nimeae (1P); apialso; pupyatipup[a]
vikasane (4P); vijmbhatevi + jbh[i] gtra-vinme (1A); vikacatevi + kac bandhane
(1A); viksein the sense of blooming; vikasativi + kas[a] gatau (1P); apialso.

1.1.11
ucchvasity api tad-bhede dvayam
udghaate pi ca
sakoce nimiaty atra mukul-bhavatti
ucchvasitiud + vas[a] prane (2P); apialso; tat-bhedein the sense of a
particular kind of blooming; dvayamthe two verbs; udghaateud + gha[a]
ceym (1A); apialso; caand; sakocein the sense of contracting, closing;
nimiatini + mi spardhym (6P); atrain this regard; mukul-bhavatimukula +
abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; itithus;
caand.
1.1.12
sakucaty api paca syur mlaty api
nimlati atho jary jarati jryaty

sakucatisam + kuc[a] sakoce (6P); apialso; pacathe five verbs; syuare;

mlatiml[a] nimeae (1P); apialso; nimlatini + ml[a] nimeae (1P); atho
start of a meaning; jarymin the sense of growing old; jaratij vayo-hnau (10P,
yuj-di); jryatij [s] vayo-hnau (4P); api also; jtij vayo-hnau (9P); caand.

1.1.13
vidratve vidalati viryate ca
sdati vidryate sphoati ca

vidratvein the sense of bursting, breaking open; vidalativi + dal[a] viarae (1P);
viryativi + hisym (9P) in karmai prayoga; caand; sdatiad[]
viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu (1P, and 6P); vidryativi + d vidrae (9P) in karmai
prayoga; sphoatisphu[ir] visarae (1P); caand; phalati[i]phal[] viarae (1P);
itithus; caand; asix; kriyverbs.
1.1.14
hrasvatve kharvati hrasaty atha nyacaty
avcati nikyate tv anutkare hyate
cpakyate
hrasvatvein the sense of becoming short; kharvatikharv[a] darpe (1P); hrasati
5
hras[a] abde (1P) ; athastart of a new meaning; nyacatini + ac[u] gatau (1U),
or ni + ac[u] gati-pjanayo (1P); avcatiava + ac[u] gatau (1U), or ava + ac[u]
gati-pjanayo (1P); nikyateni + k[a]
5
Sometimes, the dhtu hras[a] is listed
as hs[a].
 6
vilekhane karae ca (1P); tubut ; anutkarein the sense of being inferior;
hyate[o]h[k] tyge (3P); caand; apakyateapa + k[a] vilekhane
karae ca (1P).
1.1.15
karma-kartari pacpakyate
cpacyate kucaty alp-bhavaty atra

karma-kartariin karma-kartari prayoga (639); pacathe five verbs; apakyateapa

+ ki kaye (1P); caand; apacyateapa + ci[] cayane (5U); kucatikuc[a]
kauilylp-bhvayo (1P); alp- bhavatialpa + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym
(1P), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; atrain this regard; ghaategha[a] calane (1A);
caand; vidasyativi + das[u] upakaye (4P).
1.1.16
dyate kayatty etat padakam
apakaye
avaghaata ity etan nimnagder
dyated[] kaye (4A); kayatiki kaye (1P); itithus; etatthis; pada-aakam
group of eight verbs; apakayein the sense of declining, waning; avaghaateava
+ gha[a] calane (1A); iti thus; etatthe verb; nimna-g-deof rivers and so on;
apakayein the sense of declining, decaying, waning.

1.1.17
sapta pradhvasate vyeti vinayati
vilyate pralyate vine syu
praayati vipadyate
saptathe seven verbs; pradhvasatepra + dhvans[u] adha-patane (1A); vyetivi
+ i[] gatau (2P); vinayativi + a[a] adarane (4P); vilyatevi + l[] leane
(4A); pralyatepra + l[] leane (4A);vinein the sense of perishing; syuare;
praayatipra + a[a] adarane (4P); vipadyatevi + pad[a] gatau (4A).

1.1.18
paraiti praiti marae mriyate ca
pramyate santihate sampnoti
viramaty ramaty api
paraitipar + i[] gatau (2P); praitipra + i[] gatau (2P); maraein the sense
of dying; mriyatem[] pra-tyge (6A); caand; pramyatepra + m[]
hisym (4A); santihate sam + h gati-nivttau (1P); sampnotisam +
p[] vyptau (5P); viramativi + ram[u] krym (1A); ramati[] + ram[u]
krym (1A); apialso.
1.1.19
paryavasyaty uparamaty tmane pi kriy-
dvayam

paryavasyatipari + ava + o anta-karmai (4P); uparamatiupa + ram[u] krym

(1A); tmane in the tmanepada; apialso; kriy-dvayamthe two verbs; vividhym
various kinds; kriy- akamthe six verbs; samptauin the sense of cessation;
idamthese; kyateis seen.
1.1.20
nirvyaty arcia ntau nirvty apy
atra myati iti bhva-vikr a sa-

6
The word tu here indicates the following difference: nyacati and avcati are made in kartari
prayoga whereas nikyate, hyate, and apakyate are made in karma-kartari prayoga
nirvyatinir + [o]vai oae (1P); arciaof the flame; ntauin the sense of
stillness; nirvti nir + v gati-gandhanayo (2P); apialso; atrain this regard;
myatiam[u] upaame (4P); iti thus; bhva-vikrthe stages of existence; a
six; sa-bhedalong with the varieties; prya mostly; ritexplained.

iti bhva-vikra-
varga
itithus ends; bhva-vikra-vargathe section on the stages of
existence.

Prathama ka
For the most part, I have compiled from Bhaa-mallas wonderful book khyta-
candrik a collection of dhtus that are actually in use.

Now we begin the section on the stages of

existence.
1.1.2
Sattym
Asti, bhavati, and vidyate mean to be,
exist.
1.1.2
Janmani
Utpadyate, jyate, sambhavati, and udbhavati mean to take birth, be produced,
come into being.
1.1.3
Akurdy-udbhave
Prarohati and virohati mean to sprout, grow,
rise.
1.1.3
Siddhau
7
Nipadyate, phalati, sdhyati, sidhyati , and nirvartate mean to be
accomplished, successful.
1.1.4
Sthitau
8
Vasati, tihati, vartate, nivasati, ste, dhriyate, and avatihate mean to remain,
stay, be situated.
1.1.5
Jvane
Jvati, vasiti, priti, and rjayati mean
to live.
1.1.5
Punar-jvane
Pratyujjvati means to
revive.
1.1.6
Nivse
Pravasiti and nivasiti mean to
breathe.
1.1.
6
7
The manuscript found in the Rdh-Govinda temple in Jaipur has sidhyati rdhyati in the verse
instead of sdhyati sidhyati.
8
tmapada endings are applied after the dhtu h by the stra prva-sa-ve ca (Bhat 1129). In
the vtti, Jva Gosvm says: pratihate, evam ava-sa-vi.
Parime
Pariamati, pariamate, vartate, sampadyate, and kalpate mean to
transform.
1.1.7
Vddhau
Bhati, vardhate, vipolati, edhate, sthlayate, and puyati mean to
increase, expand.
1.1.8
Vddhi-bhede samddhy-khye
9
Samdhyati, mahyate, pyyate, sphyate, kramate , prathate, dhyati, dhnoti, and
pryate mean to increase (in terms of prosperity).

1.1.9
Sa-vikry vddhau
vayati and ucchrayati mean to transform while
expanding.
1.1.10
Vikse
Sphuati, sphoate, phullati, unmlati, pupyati, vijmbhate, vikacate, and vikasati
mean to bloom
1.1.11
Tad-bhede
Ucchvasiti and udghaate mean to bloom (in a
certain way).
1.1.11
Sakoce
Nimiati, mukul-bhavati, sakucati, mlati, and nimlati mean to
contract, close.
1.1.12
Jarym
Jarati, jryati, and jti mean to
grow old.
1.1.13
Vidratve
Vidalati, viryati, sdati, vidryati, sphoati, and phalati mean to burst,
break open.
1.1.14
Hrasvatve
Kharvati and hrasati mean to become
short.
1.1.14
Anutkare
Nyacati and avcati (in kartari prayoga) as well as nikyate, hyate, and
apakyate in karma- kartari prayoga mean to be debased, low.

1.1.16
Apakaye
Apakyate, apacyate, kucati, alp-bhavati, ghaate, vidasyati, dyate, and kayati
mean to decline, wane.

1.1.1
6
9
tmapada endings are applied after the dhtu kram[u] by the stra vtty-utsha-sphtatsu
krame, An tmapada ending is applied after kram[u] when the meaning is vtti (absence of
obstruction), utsha (endeavor), or sphtat (increase) (Bhat 1142). In this verse, the sense
is sphtat.
Nimnagder apakaye
Avaghaate means to dry up,
disappear.
1.1.17
Vine
Pradhvasate, vyeti, vinayati, vilyate, pralyate, praayati, and vipadyate
mean to perish.
1.1.18
Marae
Paraiti, praiti, mriyate, and pramyate mean
to die.
1.1.19
Vividhy samptau
10
Santihate, sampnoti, viramati , ramati, paryavasyati, paryavasyate, uparamati
11
, and uparamate
mean to cease, end.
1.1.20
Arcia ntau
Nirvyati, nirvti, and myati mean to be
unwavering.
12
Thus, the six stages of existence , along with their varieties, have been explained for
the most part.
Thus ends the section on the stages of
existence.

Buddhi-
varga
1.2.1
sphrtau saptvir-asty vir-bhavati
prdur-asti ca prdur-bhavati nirbhti
sphurati pratibhsate
sphrtauin the sense of appearing, becoming manifest; saptathe seven verbs;
vir-astivis + as[a] bhuvi (2P); vir-bhavativis + bh sattym (1P); prdur-asti
prdur + as[a] bhuvi (2P); caand; prdur-bhavatiprdur + bh sattym (1P);
nirbhtinir + bh dptau (2P); sphurati sphur[a] sphurae (6P); pratibhsate
prati + bhs[] dptau (1A).
1.2.2
jne jnti jnte vetti
vedvabudhyate pratyeti manute
copalabhate pratipadyate
jnein the sense of knowing; jntij avabodhane (9P); jntej avabodhane
(9P); vetti vid[a] jne (2P); vedanipta of vid[a] jne (2P), by 494; avabudhyate
ava + budh[a] avagamane (4A); pratyetiprati + i[] gatau (2P); manuteman[u]
bodhane (8A); caand; upalabhateupa + [u]labh[a] prptau (1A); pratipadyate
prati + pad[a] gatau (4A).

10
Parapada endings are applied after the dhtu ram[u] by the stra vy--paribhyo rama, tmapada
endings are forbidden after vi + ram, [] + ram, and pari + ram (except of course if it is bhva vcya
or karma vcya) (Bhat 1178). 11 Parapada endings are applied after the dhtu ram[u] by these two
stras: 1. vy--paribhyo rama, and 2. upt, The above also happens with upa + ram (Bhat 1178-
1179). Uparam has an innate causative sense when it is sa-karmaka: viudattam uparamati,
uparamayatty artha (He causes Viudatta to refrain) (Bhat vtti 1179). But uparam only
optionally takes parapada endings if it is akarmaka: vibh ced akarmaka (Bhat 1180). In the vtti,
Jva Gosvm adds: uparamati, uparamate. nivartate ity artha (uparamati and uparamate mean to
refrain).
12
The Nirukta says: jyate sti vipariamate vardhate pakyate vinayatti kramea a bhva-
vikrn hu, The wise say the six modifications of existence are, in sequence: birth, existence,
1.2.3
avagacchati cvaiti manyate
cdhigacchati vin karmtmane pi
syt savettti caturdaa
avagacchatiava + gam[] gatau (1P); ca and; avaitiava + i[] gatau (2P);
manyateman[a] jne (4A); caand; adhigacchatiadhi + gam[] gatau (1P); vin
without; karmaa karma; tmanein the tmanepada; apieven; sytis;
savettisam + vid[a] jne (2P); itithus; caturdaathe fourteen verbs.

1.2.4
ghti ca kvacij jne n-vad ca
kvacid yath vidysu nayate prjo

ghtigrah[a] updne (9U); caand; kvacitsometimes; jnein the sense of

knowing; n- vad[] prpae (1U) and vad[a] vyakty vci (1U); caand; kvacit
sometimes; yathfor example; vidysuin the three Vedas; nayateis
knowledgeable; prjathe learned person; vadateis knowledgeable; tsuin those
(the three Vedas); paitathe learned person.
1.2.5
citte manasy urasi ca karoti kurute
pade
manas gocar-kre
citteheart, mind; manasimind, heart; urasichest; caand; karoti[u]k[]
karae (8U); kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); padethe two verbs; manasby the
mind; gocar-krein the sense of making into an object of attention; manasvitve
in the sense of being clever, thoughtful; manasyatimanas (kav-di).

1.2.6
vibhrmyati viparyeti viparyasyati
vibhrame
bhramati bhrmyatty et vimatau tu
vibhrmyativi + bhram[u] anavasthne (4P); viparyetivi + pari + i[] gatau (2P);
viparyasyativi
+pari + as[u] kepae (4P); vibhramein the sense of misapprehension; bhramati
bhram[u] calane (1P); bhrmyatibhram[u] anavasthne (4P); etthese verbs;

1.2.7
kriy-traya vivadate tath
vipratipadyate sandigdhe pi ca
sandegdhi saete vicikitsati
kriy-trayamthe three verbs; vivadatevi + vad[a] vyakty vci (1U); tathand;
vipratipadyatevi + prati + pad[a] gatau (4A); sandigdhesam + dih[a] pralepe (2U);
apialso; caand; sandegdhisam + dih[a] pralepe (2U); saetesam + []
svapne (2A); vicikitsativi + kit[a] nivse rogpanayane saaye ca (1P).

1.2.8
kriy-catuka sandehe vicre tu
kriy daa mmsate carcayati vinte

kriy-catukamthe four verbs; sandehein the sense of doubting; vicrein the

sense of considering, pondering; tuend of a meaning; kriyverbs; daaten;
mmsatesvrtha-san- anta of mn[a] pjy vicrae ca (1A), by 456; carcayati
carc[a] adhyayane (10P); vintevid[a] vicrae (7A) by 78; caand; vimativi +
m[a] marane (6P); apialso.
1.2.9
tath parmati ca vicrayati ctmane
anvkate nusandhatte syt
parasmaipade py asau
tathand; parmatipar + m[a] marane (6P); caand; vicrayativi +
car[a] saaye (10U); caand; tmanein the tmenapada; anvkateanu + k[a]
darane (1A); anusandhatte anu + sam + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); syt
is; parasmaipadein the parasmaipada; apialso; asauthe verb.

1.2.10
v apy uplocate dvau parylocata
ity am vitarkayaty unnayati

auwhen there is []i; apialso; uplocateupa + loc[] darane (1A); dvauthe

two verbs; parylocatepari + [] + loc[] darane (1A); itithus; amthe two
verbs; vitarkayativi + tark[a] bhy vitarke ca (10P); unnayatiud + []
prpae (1U); tathand; utprekateud + pra + k[a] darane (1A); hateh[a]
vitarke (1A).
1.2.11
utpayati vitarke tha vivinakti
vivecane
vivevekty tmane py etau syd
utpayatiud + d[ir] prekae (1P); vitarkein the sense of speculating, imagining;
athastart of a meaning; vivinaktivi + vic[ir] pthag-bhve (7U); vivecanein the
sense of distinguishing; vivevektivi + vij[ir] pthag-bhve (3U); tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; etauthese two; sytis; vivecayaticausative of vi + vij[ir]
pthag-bhve (3U); itithus; apialso.
1.2.12
nicinute nirayate nirayati ca niraye
dhyavasyati ca niakayati ca sapta ca
nirdhrayatha nicinoti syu
nicinutenir + ci[] cayane (5U); nirayatenir + [] prpae (1U); nirayatinir +
[] prpae (1U); caand; nirayein the sense of ascertainment, deduction;
adhyavasyatiadhi + ava
+ o anta-karmai (4P); caand; niakayatinir + ak[i] bandhane (10P); caand;
saptathe seven verbs; caand; nirdhrayaticausative of nir + dh[] avasthne
(6A); ihahere; nicinoti nir + ci[] cayane (5U); syuare.
1.2.13
virambhate tu pratyeti vivasity
vasity api raddhatte raddadhtti

virambhatevi + rambh[u] pramode (1A); tuend of a meaning; pratyetiprati +

i[] gatau (2P); vivasitivi + vas[a] prane (2P); vasiti[] + vas[a] prane
(2P); apialso; raddhatte rad + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); raddadhti
rad + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); itithus; vivsein the sense of
having faith or confidence in, believing; a-kriythe six verbs; matare
considered.
1.2.14
sakalpayati sakalpe bhisandhatta iti
dvayam apadhyyaty apadhyne
dusakalpayatti ca
sakalpayatisam + kp[a] avakalpane (10P); sakalpein the sense of making a firm
resolve;
abhisandhatteabhi + sam + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); itithus; dvayam
apadhyyatiapa + dhyai cintym (1P); apadhynein the sense of having
bad thoughts;
dusakalpayatidur + sam + kp[] kp[a] avakalpane (10P); itithus; ca
1.2.15
lak-karoty uddiati syd uddee kriy-
dvay
skt-karoty tmane pi pratyake
lak-karotilaka + abhta-tad-bhve vi + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276,
1277, and 612; uddiatiud + di[a] atisarjane (6U); sytis; uddeein the sense of
mentioning, pointing out; kriy-dvaythe two verbs; skt-karotiskt (ury-di)
+ [u]k[] karae (8U), (see vtti 777); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;
pratyakein the sense of being visible, perceptible; adhyakayatinma-dhtu (tat
karoti []i) of the avyay-bhva compound adhy-aka (before the eyes); apialso.

1.2.16
skayaty api cdhyak-karoty
anubhavaty api mimte myate mti
minoti minute tath
skayatinma-dhtu of skt + tat karoti []i; apialso; caand; adhyak-
karotiadhyaka + abhta-tad-bhve vi + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276;
anubhavatianu + bh sattym (1P); apialso; mimtem[] mne (3A); myate
m[] mne (4A); mtim mne (2P); minoti [u]mi[] prakepae (5U); minute
[u]mi[] prakepae (5U); tathand.
1.2.17
pramnumopamsu syu kramt
prnpa-prvak
dhyne cintayati dhyyaty am bhvayati
pram-anum-upamsuin the senses of correct notion, inference and comparison;
syuare; kramtrespectively; prnpa-prvakpreceded by the upendras pra,
anu, or upa; dhynein the sense of thinking, meditating; cintayaticit[i] smtym
(10P); dhyyatidhyai cintym (1P); amthese; bhvayatibh avakalpane (10P);
trayamthree verbs.
1.2.18
smarae tv abhijnti smaraty adhyeti
ca trayam utkahate tathotkahaty
utkahayati cety api
smaraein the sense of remembering; tuend of a meaning; abhijntiabhi + j
avabodhane (9P); smaratism cintym (1P); adhyetiadhi + i[] gatau (2P); ca
and; trayamthe three verbs; utkahateud + kah[i] oke (1A); tathand;
utkahatiud + kah[i] oke (10P, yuj-di); utkahayatiud + kah[i] oke (10P, yuj-
di); caand; itithus; apialso.
1.2.19
pacaivotkaliky syur dhyyaty
unmanyate pratyabhijnty anusandhatte

pacathe five verbs; evaonly; utkalikymin the sense of longing; syuare;

dhyyati[]
+ adhi + i[k] smarae (2P); unmanyatenma-dhtu of unmanas + [k]ya[], see Bhat
878; pratyabhijntiprati + abhi + j avabodhane (9P); anusandhatteanu + sam +
[u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); pratisandadhtiprati + sam + [u]dh[] dhraa-
poaayo (3U); api also; caand.
1.2.20
pratisandhatte pratyavamatm
pratyabhijne vismtau vismarati ca
tathaiva prasmaraty api
pratisandhatteprati + sam + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); pratyavamati
prati + ava + m[a] marane (6P); imthese three; pratyabhijnein the sense
of recognition, recollection; vismtauin the sense of forgetfulness; vismarativi +
sm cintym (1P); caand; tath eva moreover; prasmaratipra + sm cintym
(1P); apialso.
1.2.21
mohe vicet-bhavati vimuhyati ca
mrcchati cchaty api pramde tu
srasate vimanyate
mohein the sense of bewilderment; vicet-bhavativicetas + abhta-tad-bhve vi +
bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276; vimuhyativi + muh[a] vaicittye (4P); caand;
mrcchatimrch[] moha- samucchryayo (1P); cchaticch[a] gatndriya-
pralaya-mrt-bhveu (6P); apialso; pramde in the sense of being inattentive; tu
end of a meaning; srasatesrans[u] pramde (1A); vimanyatenma-dhtu of
vimanas + [k]ya[], see Bhat 878.
1.2.22
pramdyatti viman-bhavatti
catuayam samdadhty avadadhty

pramdyatipra + mad[] hare (4P); itithus; viman-bhavativimanas + abhta-

tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276; itithus; catuayamthe four
verbs; samdadhtisam + [] + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); avadadhti
ava + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); api also; praidadhtipra + ni +
[u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); caand.
1.2.23
tmane cvadhne syur
avadhrayatty api
ag-kre pratioty atra sagirate
tmanein the tmanepada; caand; avadhnein the sense of attentiveness,
absorption; syu are; avadhrayaticausative of ava + dh[] avasthne (6A); iti
thus; apithus; ag-krein the sense of agreeing, accepting; pratiotiprati +
ru ravae (1P); atrain this regard; sagirate sam + g abde (9P); apialso; ca
and.
1.2.24
akarmaka saute parasmai cet sa-
karmakam urary-ry-rarbhya ca karoti
kurute pade
akarmakamwhich does not take a karma; sautesam + ru ravae (1P);
parasmai parasmaipada; cetif; sa-karmakamtakes a karma; urary-ry-rarbhya
13
after the words urar, r, ur, and rar ; caand; karoti[u]k[] karae (8U);
kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); pade
the two verbs.
1.2.25
aau syu pratijnte bhyupaity
abhyupagacchati
anujne numanute nujnty
aauthe eight verbs; syuare; pratijnteprati + j avabodhane (9P); abhyupaiti
abhi + upa + i[] gatau (2P); abhyupagacchatiabhi + upa + gam[] gatau (1P);
anujnein the sense of

13
In this regard, Pinis stra is ry-di-cvi-ca ca (Adhyy 1.4.61). Kik only mentions ur,
r, and urar. Apte as well as Monier-Williams dictionaries mention ur, r, urar, and rar only.
Siddhnta-kaumud (762) lists r and urar only. The ury-dis are used in conjuntion with the dhtus
k, bh, and as (Commentary 777). In Prayuktkhyta-majar, the ury-dis are also mentioned in
1.4.21 and in 3.3.31. For a further discussion on the ury-dis, see vtti 777.
permitting; anumanuteanu + man[u] bodhane (8A); anujntianu + j
avabodhane (9P); anumanyateanu + man[a] jne (4A).

1.2.26
atraivbhyanujnti catasro tha
vilokane
nirvarayati nidhyyaty lokayati
atrain this regard; evaonly; abhyanujntiabhi + anu + j avabodhane (9P);
catasrafour; athastart of a meaning; vilokanein the sense of looking;
nirvarayatinir + vara vara-kriy- vistra-gua-vacaneu (10P); nidhyyatini +
dhyai cintym (1P); lokayaticausative of [] + lok[] darane (1A); payati
d[ir] prekae (1P).
1.2.27
nirpayati sampayaty tmane syd
akarmakam lokate lakayate

nirpayatini + rpa rpa-kryym (10P); sampayatisam + d[ir] prekae (1P);

tmanein the tmanepada; sytis; akarmakamdoes not take a karma; lokate
[] + lok[] darane (1A); lakayatelak[a] locane (10A); nibhlayateni + bhal[a]
nirpae (ni-prvo darane) (10A); katek[a] darane (1A).

1.2.28
vicyaty tmane pi dvau nimayati
cety api locate lakayati ca kriy
pacadaodit
vicyativi + ci[] cayane (10U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; dvauthe
two verbs; nimayatini + am[a] locane (10A); caand; itithus; apialso;
locateloc[] darane (1A); lakayatilak[a] darankayo (10P); caand; kriy
verbs; pacadaafifteen (including
14
nibundati ); uditare declared.
1.2.29
oty karayati ca tadvan
niamayaty api nimyatti ravae
ghrtau jighrati ighati
otiru ravae (1P); karayatinma-dhtu of kara + tat karoti []i; ca
and; tadvat similarly; niamayaticausative of ni + am[u] upaame (4P, gha-
di); apialso; nimyatini + am[u] upaame (4P), by 541; itithus; ravaein
the sense of hearing; ghrtauin the sense of smelling; jighratighr gandhopdne
(1P), by 419; ighatiigh[i] ghre (1P).
1.2.30
spaty mati spare cchupaty
labhate pi ca
svdane rasayati lehi csvdayaty api
lhe ceti catuka syd buddhi-vargo
spatisp[a] saspare (6P); mati[] + m[a] marane (marana
spara, vimara locana ca) (6P); sparein the sense of touching; cchupati
chup[a] saspare (6P); labhate [] + [u]labh[a] prptau (1A); apialso; ca
and; svdanein the sense of relishing, enjoying; rasayatirasa svdana-
snehanayo (10P); lehilih[a] svdane (2U); caand; svdayati causative of []
+ svd[a] svdane (1A); apialso; lhelih[a] svdane (2U); caand; itithus;
catukamthe four verbs; sytis; buddhi-vargasection on intelligence; ayam
this; ritais proclaimed.
14
The dhtu [u]bund[ir] nimane (1U) is supplied to the list in order that the total becomes fifteen, as
the text suggests. The corresponding verse in khyta-candrik is: nirpayaty api nimayate ca
vicyati, nibundaty tmane pi dvau lakayaty api locate (khyta-candrik 1.2.53).
itithus ends; buddhi-vargathe section on
intelligence.

Now we begin the section on the functions of

intelligence.
1.2.1
Sphrtau
vir-asti, vir-bhavati, prdur-asti, prdur-bhavati, nirbhti, sphurati, and
pratibhsate mean to appear, become manifest.

1.2.2
Jne
15
Jnti, jnte , vetti, veda, avabudhyate, pratyeti, manute, upalabhate,
pratipadyate, avagacchati, avaiti, manyate, adhigacchati, savetti, and the akarmaka
16
verb savitte mean to know .
Sometimes ghti also means to know as do nayate and vadate. For example,
vidysu nayate prja, The learned person is knowledgeable in the three Vedas,
and vidysu vadate paita, The learned person is knowledgeable in the three
1.2.5
Manas gocar-kre
Citte-karoti, citte-kurute, manasi-karoti, manasi-kurute, urasi-karoti, and urasi-kurute
mean to keep in mind, take to heart.

1.2.5
Manasvitve
Manasyati means to be thoughtful,
clever.
1.2.6
Vibhrame
Vibhrmyati, viparyeti, viparyasyati, bhramati, and bhrmyati mean to be
under the wrong impression.

1.2.6
Vimatau
Vimanyate, vivadate, and vipratipadyate mean to have a difference
of opinion.
1.2.8
Sandehe
Sandigdhe, sandegdhi, saete, and vicikitsati mean
to doubt.
1.2.8
Vicre
Mmsate, carcayati, vintte, vimati, parmati, vicrayati, vicrayate,
anvkate, anusandhatte, anusandadhti, uplocate, uplocayati, parylocate, and
parylocayati mean
to consider, ponder.
1.2.11
Vitarke
Vitarkayati, unnayati, utprekate, hate, and utpayati mean to
speculate, imagine.

15
tmapada endings are applied after the dhtu j when it is akarmaka or when it has the meaning of
apahnava (hiding, concealment): jo karmakpahnavrthata (Bhat 1148).
16
Savetti is sa-karmaka only, and savitte is akarmaka only (Bhat 1132).
1.2.11
Vivecane
Vivinakti, vivikte, vivevekti, vivevekte, vivecayati, and vivecayate mean to
discriminate, distinguish.
1.2.12
Niraye
Nicinute, nirayate, nirayati, adhyavasyati, niakayati, nirdhrayati, and
nicinoti mean to ascertain.

1.2.13
Vivse
Virambhate, pratyeti, vivasiti, vasit, raddhatte, and raddadhti mean
to believe.
1.2.14
Sakalpe
Sakalpayati and abhisandhatte mean to make a firm
resolution.
1.2.14
Apadhyne
Apadhyyati and dusakalpayati mean to think
negatively.
1.2.15
Uddee
Lak-karoti and uddiati mean to mention,
pount out.
1.2.15
Pratyake
Skt-karoti, skt-kurute, adhyakayati, skayati, adhyak-karoti, and
anubhavati mean to directly experience.

1.2.17
Pramnumopamsu
The verbs mimte, myate, mti, minoti, and minute, when preceded by the
upendras pra, anu, and
upa, mean to have the correct notion, to infer, and to compare, respectively.
1.2.17
Dhyne
Cintayati, dhyyati, and bhvayati mean to think,
meditate.
1.2.18
Smarae
Abhijnti, smarati, and adhyeti mean to
remember.
1.2.19
Utkalikym
Utkahate, utkahati, utkahayati, dhyyati, and unmanyate mean
to long for.
1.2.20
Pratyabhijne
Pratyabhijnti, anusandhatte, pratisandadhti, pratisandhatte, and
pratyavamati mean to recognize, recollect.

1.2.20
Vismt
au
Vismarati and prasmarati mean to
forget.
1.2.21
Mohe
Vicet-bhavati, vimuhyati, mrcchati, and cchati mean to be
bewildered.
1.2.21
Pramde
Srasate, vimanyate, pramdyati, and viman-bhavati mean to be
inattentive.
1.2.23
Avadhne
Samdadhti, samdhatte, avadadhti, avadhatte, praidadhti, praidhatte, and
avadhrayati mean to be attentive, absorbed.

1.2.23
Ag-kre
Pratioti, sagirate, saute (if without a karma), saoti (if with a karma),
pratijnte, abhyupaiti, and abhyupagacchati mean to accept, agree as do karoti
and kurute when connected with the avyayas urari, ur, r, urar, and rar.

1.2.25
Anujne
Anumanute, anujnti, anumanyate, and abhyanujnti mean to
permit, approve.
1.2.26
Vilokane
Nirvarayati, nidhyyati, lokayati, payati, nirpayati, sampayate (if without a karma),
17
lokate, lakayate, nibhlayate, kate, vicyati, vicyate, nimayati , nimayate,
locate, lakayati, nibundati, and nibundate mean to see, perceive.

1.2.29
ravae
oti, karayati, niamayati, and nimyati mean to
hear, listen.
1.2.29
Ghrtau
Jighrati, ighati, spati, and mati mean to
smell.
1.2.30
Spare
Cchupati and labhate mean to
touch.
1.2.30
svdane
Rasayati, lehi, svdayati, and lhe mean to taste,
relish, enjoy.
Here ends the section on the functions of
intelligence.

Antakaraa-vtti-
varga

17
The dhtu am[a] locane (10A) is not a gha-di, but am[u] upaame (4P) is
(Commentary 570).
1.3.1
abhilayaty abhilaaty tmane py
anurudhyate kkati sphayati
nthate vai lipsate
abhilayatiabhi + la[a] kntau (4P); abhilaatiabhi + la[a] kntau (1U); tmane
in the tmanepada; apialso; anurudhyateanu + rudh kme (4A); kkati[] +
kk[i] kkym (1P); sphayatispha psym (10P); nthatenth[]
ycopatpaivarysu (1A); vaiva[a] kntau (2P); lipsatedesiderative of
[u]labh[a] prptau (1A) by 584.
1.3.2
asate kmayate vchatcchaty
abhpsati samhate tathste

asate[] + as[i] icchym (1A); kmayatekam[u] kntau (1A); vchati

vch[i] cchym (1P); icchatii[u] icchym (6P) by 399; abhpsatinipta of the
desiderative of abhi + p[] vyptau (5P) by 584; samhatesam + h[a] ce-
vchayo (1A); tathand; ste[] + s[u] icchym (2A); vchymin the
sense of desiring; tithi-sajakthose which are designated as fifteen (i.e there are
fifteeen tithis in a paka).
1.3.3
lobhe traya lubhyatti dhanyati ca
gdhyati udyukte tu prayatate
kramate ca vyavasyati
lobhein the sense of coveting, being greedy for; trayamthe three verbs; lubhyati
lubh[a] grddhye (4P); itithus; dhanyatinma-dhtu of dhana + [k]ya[n], by Bhat
866; caand; gdhyatigdh[u] abhikkym (4P); udyukteud + yuj[ir] yoge (7U);
tuend of the meaning; prayatatepra + yat[] prayatne (1A); kramatekram[u]
pda-vikepe (1P); caand; vyavasyativi
+ ava + o anta-karmai (4P).
1.3.4
utsahaty tmane pi syt prayatne pada-
pacakam vipryate parajati dvei dvee
parajyati
utsahatiud + ah[a] marae (10P, yuj-di); tmanein the tmanepada (ud +
ah[a] marae (1A)); apialso; sytis; prayatnein the sense of making a
strenuous effort; pada-pacakamthe five verbs; vipryatevi + pr[] prtau (4A);
aparajatiapa + ranj[a] rge (1U); dveidvi[a] aprtau (2U); dveein the sense
of hating; aparajyatiapa + ranj[a] rge (4U).
1.3.5
viruaddhi vighti pacm
ctmanepade vairyate tu vidvei
virdhnoti virudhyate
viruaddhivi + rudh[ir] varae (7U); vightivi + grah[a] updne (9U); paca
the five verbs; amthese; caand; tmanepadein the tmanepada; vairyate
nma-dhtu of vaira + [k]ya[], by 609; tuend of the meaning; vidveivi +
dvi[a] aprtau (2U); virdhnotivi + rdh[a] samsiddhau (5P); virudhyatevi +
rudh[ir] varae (7U) in karmai prayoga.
1.3.6
virdhyati ca vaire syt tath
vyutthihate pi ca asyaty
abhyasyym rym
virdhyativi + rdh[a] sasiddhau (4P); caand; vairein the sense of enmity; syt
is; tath
and; vyutthihatevi + ud + h gati-nivttau (1P); apialso; caand; asyatiasu
di); abhyasyymin the sense of being jealous of; rymin the sense of
envying; ryati ry[a] ryym (1P); rkyatirky[a] ryym (1P).

1.3.7
sagharati spardhate ca spardhy
pratigarjati modate hldate hyaty

sagharatisam + gh[u] saghare (1P); spardhatespardh[a] saghare (1A); ca

and; spardhymin the sense of rivalry, emulation; pratigarjatiprati + garj[a]
abde (1P); modate mud[a] hare (1A); hldatehld[] avyakte abde sukhe ca
(1A); hyatih[a] tuau (4P); nandayaticausative of [] + [u]nad[i]
samddhau (1P); tuyatitu[a] tuau (4P).
1.3.8
prti pryate prtau nirvoty
tmane pi ca pracet-bhavatty atra
praman-bhavatti ca
prtipr[] tarpae icchy ca (9U); pryatepr[] prtau (4A); prtauin the
sense of pleasing, rejoicing; nirvotinir + v[] varae (5U); tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; ca and; pracet-bhavatipracetas + abhta-tad-bhve vi +
bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276; itithus; atrain this regard; praman-bhavati
pramanas + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276; itithus; ca
and.
1.3.9
sumanyata ity eva suman-
bhavatty api sukhyate ca nirvtty
et prokt caturdaa
sumanyatenma-dhtu of sumanas + [k]ya[], by Bhat 878; itithus; evam
similarly; suman- bhavatisumanas + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by
776, 1276; itithus; apialso; sukhyatesukha tat-kriyym (kav-di); caand;
nirvtinir + v gati-gandhanayo (2P); iti thus; etthese; proktare called;
caturdaafourteen verbs.
1.3.10
lajjate trapate mandkayaty api
hyate jihretti hriy paca
bibhety udvijate bhaye
lajjate[o]laj[] vrym (6A); trapatetrap[] lajjym (1A); mandkayatinma-
dhtu (tat karoti []i) of the compound manda-aka; apialso; hyateh[]
gh-lajjayo (kav-di); jihretihr lajjym (3P); itithus; hriymin the sense of
being ashamed, shy; pacathe five verbs; bibhetivi + [i]bh bhaye (3P); udvijate
ud + [o]vij[] bhaya-calanayo (6A); bhayein the sense of being fearful.

1.3.11
trasati trasyati tath kamy tu
titikate sahatty tmane pi syt

trasatitras[] udvege (1P); trasyatitras[] udvege (4P); tathand; kamymin

the sense of tolerating, forgiving; tuend of the meaning; titikatesvrtha-san-anta
of tij[a] nine kamy ca (1A) by 442; sahatiah[a] marae (10P, yuj-di); iti
thus; tmanein the tmanepada (ah[a] marae (1A)); apialso; sytis; trayam
the group of three verbs; myatim[a] kamym (4U); maratim[u] sahane
(1P) (and m[u] titikym (10A, yuj-di) for the tmapada).
1.3.12
kmyati kamate ceti sapta
shayatty api
andare vajnti tath
kmyatikam[] sahane (4P); kamatekam[s] sahane (1A); caand; itithus;
saptathe seven verbs; shayatiah[a] marae (10P); itithus; apialso; andare
in the sense of disrespecting; avajntiava + j avabodhane (9P); tathand;
paribhavatipari + bh sattym (1P); apialso.

1.3.13
ekdavagaayaty avadhrayatti ca
asat-tirobhy kurute parasmaipada-
bhg api
ekdaathe eleven verbs; avagaayatiava + gaa sakhyne (10P);
avadhrayati avadhra avajym (10P); itithus; caand; asat-tiras-bhym
18
after asat and tiras ; kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); parasmaipada-bhkwhich
takes parasmaipada endings; apialso.
1.3.14
tathvamanute cvamnayaty
avamanyate vimnayati
ctrvahelayaty api heate
tathand; avamanuteava + man[u] bodhane (8A); caand; avamnayatiava +
mn[a] pjym (10P); avamanyateava + man[a] jne (4A); vimnayativi +
mn[a] pjym (10P); caand; atrain this regard; avahelayaticausative of ava +
19
he[] andare (1A) ; apialso; heate he[] andare (1A).

1.3.15
vacane vipralabhate tath
vacayate pi ca tmane ca dvaya
viprakaroti nikaroti ca
vacanein the sense of cheating, deceiving; vipralabhatevi +pra +
[u]labh[a] prptau (1A); tathand; vacayatevac[u] pralambhane (10A);
apialso; caand; tmanein the tmanepada; caand; dvayamthe two
verbs; viprakarotivi + pra + [u]k[] karae (8U); nikarotini + [u]k[]
karae (8U); caand.
1.3.16
atrollpayate cbhisandhatte
chalayaty api pratrayati

atrain this regard; ullpayatecausative of ud + lap[a] vyakty vci (1P); caand;

abhisandhatteabhi + sam + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); chalayatinma-
dhtu of chala + tat karoti []i; apialso; pratrayaticausative of pra + t plavana-
taraayo (1P); caivaand; abhisandadhtiabhi + sam + [u]dh[] dhraa-
poaayo (3U); vicativyac[a] vyj-karae (6P), by 473; apialso.

1.3.17
dvdaa syur gardhayate pralobhayati
cety api prastobhayati tad-bhede tath
protshayaty api
dvdaathe twelve verbs; syuare; gardhayatecausative of gdh[u]
abhikkym (4P); pralobhayaticausative of pra + lubh[a] grddhye (4P); caand;
itithus; apialso; prastobhayaticausative of pra + ubh[u] stambhe (1A); tat-
bhedein the sense of a special type of cheating; tathand; protshayatipra + ud +
ah[a] marae (10P); apialso.
18
The words asat and tiras are ury-dis (vtti 777).
19
Avaheayati optionally becomes avahelayati because la-rma and a-rma (as well as ra-
rma and la-rma) are interchangable: a-layo ra-layo ca prya-ekatva-ravat (Bhat vtti
128). Ba-rma and va-rma can also be interchangeable (Bhat Saodhin 128).
1.3.18
dambha-kriyy dabhnoti tathaiva
dambhayaty api jighsati druhyati ca drohe
vypdayaty api
dambha-kriyymin the sense of deceiving; dabhnotidanbh[u] dambhe (5P);
tathaivaand; dambhayaticausative of danbh[u] dambhe (5U); apialso;
jighsatidesiderative of han[a] his-gatyo (2P); druhyatidruh[a] jighsym
(4P); caand; drohein the sense of being hostile, seeking to harm; vypdayati
causative vi + [] + pad[a] gatau (4P); apialso.
1.3.19
apardhyati rdhnoti radhyatty
apardhane apakre pakurute
kioty apakaroti ca
apardhyatiapa + rdh[a] sasiddhau (4P); rdhnotiapa + rdh[a] samsiddhau
(5P); radhyati apa + radh[a] sarddhau hisy ca (4P); itithus; apardhane
in the sense of offending; apakrein the sense of hurting; apakuruteapa +
[u]k[] karae (8U); kiotiki[u] hisym (8U); apakarotiapa + [u]k[]
karae (8U); caand.
1.3.20
paca krodhe sarabhate ruyati
krudhyatti ca bhmate kupyatti syd
ghty tmane pi ca
pacathe five verbs; krodhein the sense of being angry; sarabhatesam +
rabh[a] rbhasye (1A); ruyatiru[a] roe (4P); krudhyatikrudh[a] kope (4P);
itithus; caand; bhmate bhm[a] krodhe (1A); kupyatikup[a] kope (4P); iti
thus; sytis; ghti[] + grah[a] updne (9U); tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; caand.
1.3.21
abhi-prva niviate nirbadhnty grahe
trayam
karuy tu dayate nughty tmane
abhi-prvampreceded by abhi; niviateni + vi[a] praveane (6P), tmapada by
Bhat 1115; nirbadhntinir + bandh[a] bandhane (9P); grahein the sense of
insisting, being obstinate; trayamthe three verbs; karuymin the sense of
being merciful, showing favor; tuend of a meaning; dayateday[a] rakae dna-
gati-hisdneu ca (1A); anughtianu + grah[a] updne (9U); tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; caand.
1.3.22
kpyate ca karuyate cpy
anukampate anukroaty api syu a
tad-bhede tu prasdati
kpyatenma-dhtu of kp + [k]ya[], by Bhat 879; caand; karuyatenma-
dhtu of karu + [k]ya[], by Bhat 879; caand; apialso; anukampateanu +
kap[i] calane (1A); anukroatianu + kru[a] hvne (1P); apialso; syuare; a
the six verbs; tat-bhedein the sense of a special way of showing favor; tuend of a
meaning; prasdatipra + ad[] viaraa-gaty- avasdaneu (1P, 6P).

1.3.23
oke tu ocatty eka vidaty
anutapyate anuete nutapati
pact-tpe kriy mat
okein the sense of lamenting, grieving; tuend of a meaning; ocatiuc[a] oke
(hni-smarae anusandhna oka) (1P); itithus; ekamone; vidativi + ad[]
viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu
(1P, 6P); anutapyateanu + tap[a] dhe aivarye v (4A); anueteanu + []
svapne (2A); anutapatianu + tap[a] santpe (1P); pact-tpein the sense of
regretting, repenting; kriy verbs; matare considered.

1.3.24
nirvidyate tu nirvede nirvi-
bhavatty api kriy-dvaya vilapati
vilpe paridevati
nirvidyatenir + vid[a] sattym (4A); tuend of a meaning; nirvedein the sense of
being disgusted, despondent; nirvi-bhavatinirvia + bh sattym (1P); iti
thus; apithus; kriy- dvayamthe two verbs; vilapativi + lap[a] vyakty vci (1P);
vilpein the sense of lamenting,
20
wailing; paridevatipari + dev[] devane (1A) or div[u] parikjane (10A).
1.3.25
rodity arayati krandaty api bpyate
pi ca anurajyaty anurajaty tmane pi
pada-dvayam
roditirud[ir] aru-vimocane (2P); arayatinma-dhtu of aru + tat karoti []i;
krandatikrad[i] hvne rodane ca (1P); apialso; bpyatenma-dhtu of bpa
+ [k]ya[], by Bhat 883; api also; caand; anurajyatianu + ranj[a] rge (4U);
anurajatianu + ranj[a] rge (1U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; pada-
dvayamthe two verbs.
1.3.26
pryate snihyati tath snehe pada-
catuayam

pryatepr[] prtau (4A); snihyatiih[a] prtau (4P); tathand; snehein the

sense of being affectionate, loving; pada-catuayamthe four verbs; garvein the
sense of being proud; abhimanuteabhi + man[u] bodhane (8A); garvayategarv[a]
darpe (1P); dpyatidp[a] garve (4P); mdyatimad[] hare (4P).

1.3.27
ahakaroty tmane pi kvate
cbhimanyate garvaty uddhanty
athonmde loaty unmdyatti ca
ahakaroti aham + [u]k[] karae (8U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;
kvatekv[] made (1A); caand; abhimanyateabhi + man[a] jne (4A); garvati
garv[a] darpe (1P); uddhantiud + han[a] his-gatyo (2P); athastart of a
meaning; unmdein the sense of being intoxicated, maddened; loatilo[] unmde
(1P); unmdyatiud + mad[] hare (4P); itithus; caand.

1.3.28
tmyati klmyati glnau glyati klmatti
ca malin-bhavati mlnau mlyaty api

tmyatitam[u] glnau (4P); klmyatiklam[u] glnau (4P); glnauin the sense of

being tired, exhausted; glyatiglai hara-kaye (1P); klmatiklam[u] glnau (1P); iti
thus; caand; malin- bhavatimalina + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P),
by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; mlnauin the sense of fading, withering; mlyatimlai
gtra-vinme (1P); apialso; pada-dvayamthe two verbs.

20
khyta-candrik has the reading paridevati as well. Siddhnta-kaumud (3122) says paridevati is
made with the dhtu dev[] devane (1A), whereas Jva Gosvm seems to indicate that it is made
with the dhtu div[u] parikjane (10A) in the stra parer divi-kipa-raa-vada-daha-muho ini (Bhat
1529).
1.3.29
khidyate glepate dainye rmyatti
parirame
tathaivyasyatty atra prayasyati
khidyatekhid[a] dainye (4A); glepateglep[] dainye(1A); dainyein the sense of
being miserable, depressed; rmyatiram[u] tapasi khede ca (4P); itithus;
pariramein the sense of working hard, overendeavoring; tathaivaand; yasyati
[] + yas[u] prayatne (4P); itithus; atrain this regard; prayasyatipra + yas[u]
prayatne (4P); pada-traythe three words.
1.3.30
kliyate vyathate dukhyate
kcchryate pi ca dyate ceti
dukhitve jugupsy jugupsate
kliyatekli[a] upatpe (4A); vyathatevyath[a] bhaye dukhe calane ca (1A);
dukhyatenma- dhtu of dukha + [k]ya[], by Bhat 886; kcchryatenma-
dhtu of kcchra + [k]ya[]; apialso; caand; dyated[] paritpe (4A); caand; iti
thus; dukhitvein the sense of being unhappy; jugupsymin the sense of
despising; jugupsatesvrtha-san-anta of gup[a] gopana-kutsanayo (1A) by 442.

1.3.31
bbhatsate tha jmbhy jmbhate
jambhate pi ca pramlatti tandry
ghrate pracalyate
bbhatsatesvrtha-san-anta of badh[a] bandhane nindy ca (1A) by 456; atha
start of a meaning; jmbhymin the sense of yawning; jmbhatejbh[i] gtra-
vinme (1A); jambhate jabh[a] gtra-vinme (1A); apialso; caand; pramlatipra
+ ml[a] nimeae (1P); tandrymin the sense of sleepiness, lassitude; ghrate
ghr[a] bhramae (1A); pracalyatenma-dhtu of pracala + [k]ya[].

1.3.32
ete nidrti nidryaty api nidryate pi
ca tath saviati svpe svapity api ca
a kriy
ete[] svapne (2A); nidrtini + dr kutsy gatau (2P); nidryatini + drai
svapne (1P); apialso; nidryateni + drai svapne (1P); apialso; caand; tath
and; saviatisam + vi[a] praveane (6P); svpein the sense of sleeping,
dreaming; svapiti[i]vap[a] aye (2P); apialso; caand; asix; kriyverbs.

1.3.33
prabudhyate tu jgarti jgaryy
pada-dvayam
prabodhane cetayate prabodhayati cety
prabudhyatepra + budh[a] avagamane (4A); tuend of a meaning; jgartijg
nidr-kaye (2P); jgaryymin the sense of waking; pada-dvayamthe two verbs;
prabodhanein the sense of enlightening, arising from sleep, emerging out of
ignorance; cetayatecit[a] savedane (10A); prabodhayaticausative of pra +
budh[ir] bodhane (1U) or budh[a] avagamane (1P, 4A); caand; itithus; apialso.

1.3.34
hasaty akarmaka hse prahse tu sa-
karmakam smayate hasite svalpe
garhye kusmayate smite
hasatihas[e] hasane (1P); akarmakamwhen without a karma; hsein the sense
of laughing;
prahsein the sense of laughing at someone; tubut; sa-karmakamwhen with
smayatemi[] ad-dhasane (1A); hasitein the sense of smiling or laughing;
svalpevery little; garhyein the sense of being reproachable; kusmayatekusm[a]
ku-smaye (10A); smitein the sense of smiling or laughing.

1.3.35
madhyame syd vihasati su-prauhe
pahasaty ada
sa-ninde tpahasati parihse tu bhaate
madhyameintermediate; sytis; vihasativi + has[e] hasane (1P); su-prauhe
fully grown; apahasatiapa + has[e] hasane (1P); adathe verb; sa-nindein the
sense of including derision; tubut; upahasatiupa + has[e] hasane (1P); parihse
in the sense of ridicule; tuend of a meaning; bhaatebha[i] paribhane (1A).

1.3.36
tath parihasaty atra vismaye tu pada-
dvayam vismer-bhavatty atra tath
vismayate pi ca
tathand; parihasatipari + has[e] hasane (1P); atrain this regard; vismayein the
sense of being astonished; tupda-prae; pada-dvayamthe two verbs; vismer-
bhavativismera + abhta-tad- bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276, 1277, and
612; itithus; atrain this regard; tathand; vismayatevi + mi[] ad-dhasane
(1A); apialso; caand.
ity antakaraa-
varga
itithus ends; antakaraa-vargathe section on
the mind.

Now we begin the section on the functions of

the mind.
1.3.2
Vchym
Abhilayati, abhilaati, abhilaate, anurudhyate, kkati, sphayati, nthate, vai,
lipsate, asate, kmayate, vchati, icchati, abhpsati, samhate, and ste mean
to desire.
1.3.3
Lobhe
Lubhyati, dhanyati, and gdhyati mean to covet, be
greedy.
1.3.4
Prayatne
21
Udyukte, prayatate, kramate , vyavasyati, utsahati, and utsahate mean to make a
strenuous effort.
1.3.4
Dvee
Vipryate, aparajati, aparajate, dvei, dvee, aparajyati, aparajyate, viruaddhi,
virunddhe, vighti,

1.3.6
Vaire
Vairyate, vidvei, virdhnoti, virudhyate, virdhyati, and vyutthihate mean
to be inimical.

21
tmapada endings are applied after the dhtu kram[u] by the stra vtty-utsha-sphtatsu
krame, An tmapada ending is applied after kram[u] when the meaning is vtti (absence of
obstruction), utsha (endeavor), or sphtat (increase) (Bhat 1142). In this verse, the sense
is utsha.
1.3.6
Abhyasyym
Asyati means to be jealous
of.
1.3.6
rym
ryati and rkyati mean to
envy.
1.3.7
Spardhym
Sagharati, spardhate, and pratigarjati mean to
emulate, rival.
1.3.8
Prtau
Modate, hldate, hyati, nandayati, tuyati, prti, pryate, nirvoti, nirvute,
pracet-bhavati, praman-bhavati, sumanyate, suman-bhavati, sukhyate, and
nirvti mean to rejoice, please, be happy.

1.3.10
Hriym
Lajjate, trapate, mandkayati, hyate, and jihreti mean to be
shy, ashamed.
1.3.10
Bhaye
Bibheti, udvijate, trasati, and trasyati mean to be
fearful.
1.3.11
Kamym
Titikate, sahati, sahate, myati, myate, marati, marate, kmyati, kamate, and
shayati mean to tolerate, forgive.

1.3.12
Andare
Avajnti, paribhavati, avagaayati, avadhrayati, asat-karoti, asat-kurute, tiras-
karoti, tiras-kurute, avamanute, avamnayati, avamanyate, vimnayati, avahelayati,
and heate mean to disrespect.
1.3.15
Vacane
Vipralabhate, vacayate, viprakaroti, viprakurute, nikaroti, nikurute, ullpayate,
abhisandhatte, chalayati, pratrayati, abhisandadhti, vicati, gardhayate, and
pralobhayati mean to cheat.
1.3.17
Tad-bhede
22
Prastobhayati and protshayati mean to cheat (in a
certain way).
1.3.18
Dambha-kriyym
Dabhnoti and dambhayati mean to
deceive.
1.3.1
8
Droh
22
Jva Gosvm gives an example: yo dadhy-odana dadti, sa ka payati. iti dtra ka-
darana-siddhau protshayati, He who gives yoghurt and rice will see Ka! [Madhumagala, eager
to fill his belly, uses trickery and] encourages the donator with the achievement of Kas
darana (Bhat vtti 1072).
Jighsati, druhyati, and vypdayati mean to seek to harm, be
hostile.
1.3.19
Apardhane
Apardhyati, apardhnoti, and aparadhyati mean to
23
offend.
1.3.19
Apakre
Apakurute, kioti, and apakaroti mean to hurt, be
malevolent.
1.3.20
Krodhe
Sarabhate, ruyati, krudhyati, bhmate, and kupyati mean to
be angry.
1.3.21
grahe
ghti, ghte, abhiniviate, and nirbadhnti mean to insist, be
obstinate.
1.3.21
Karuym
Dayate, anughti, anughte, kpyate, karuyate, anukampate, and
anukroati mean to be merciful, show favor.

1.3.22
Tad-bhede
Prasdati means to be merciful (in a certain
way).
1.3.23
oke
ocati means to lament,
grieve.
1.3.23
Pact-tpe
Vidati, anutapyate, anuete, and anutapati mean to
repent, regret.
1.3.24
Nirvede
Nirvidyate and nirvi-bhavati mean to be disgusted,
despondent.
1.3.24
Vilpe
Paridevati, roditi, arayati, krandati, and bpyate mean to
lament, wail.
1.3.26
Snehe
Anurajyati, anurajyate, anurajati, anurajate, pryate, and snihyati mean to be
affectionate.
1.3.26
Garve
Abhimanute, garvayate, dpyati, mdyati, ahakaroti, ahakurute, kvate,
abhimanyate, garvati, and

23
Although this verse reads apardhyati rdhnoti radhyatty apardhane, the upendra apa is
supplied to the verbs
1.3.27
Unmde
Loati and unmdyati mean to be intoxicated,
maddened.
1.3.28
Glnau
Tmyati, klmyati, glyati, and klmati mean to be tired,
exhausted.
1.3.28
Mlnau
Malin-bhavati and mlyati mean to fade,
wither.
1.3.29
Dainye
Khidyate and glepate mean to be miserable,
depressed.
1.3.29
Parirame
rmyati, yasyati, and prayasyati mean to work hard,
overendeavor.
1.3.30
Dukhitve
Kliyate, vyathate, dukhyate, kcchryate, and dyate mean to
be unhappy.
1.3.30
Jugupsym
Jugupsate and bbhatsate mean to
despise.
1.3.31
Jmbhym
Jmbhate and jambhate mean to
yawn.
1.3.31
Tandrym
Pramlati, ghrate, and pracalyate mean to be tired,
lazy, sleepy.
1.3.32
Svpe
ete, nidrti, nidryati, nidryate, saviati, and svapiti mean
to sleep.
1.3.33
Jgaryym
Prabudhyate and jgarti mean to
awake.
1.3.33
Prabodhane
Cetayate and prabodhayati mean to be enlightened, be aroused from sleep or
ignorance.
1.3.34
Hse
Hasati means to laugh (if it has no
karma).
1.3.34
Prah
se
Hasati means to laugh (at someone) (if it has a
karma).
1.3.34
Svalpe hasite
Smayate means to smile or laugh
24
slightly.
1.3.34
Garhye smite
Kusmayate means to smile or laugh
improperly.
1.3.35
Madhyame smite
Vihasati means to smile or laugh without much
25
reserve.
1.3.35
Su-prauhe smite
Apahasati means to smile or laugh without
reserve.
1.3.35
Sa-ninde smite
Upahasati means to smile or laugh at someone
deridingly.
1.3.35
Parihse
Bhaate and parihasati mean to
ridicule.
1.3.36
Vismaye
Vismer-bhavati and vismayate mean to be
astonished.
Here ends the section on the functions of the
mind.

Vk-kriy-
varga
1.4.1
cae vakti vadati lapayaty khyti
bhate abhidhatte parasmai ca brte
vyharate trayam
cae[] + cak[i] vyakty vci (2A); vaktivac[a] paribhae (2P); vadati
vad[a] vyakty vci (1P); lapayatilap[a] vyakty vci (1P); khyti[] +
khy prakathane (2P); bhatebh[a] vyakty vci (1A); abhidhatteabhi +
[u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); parasmaiparasmaipada; caand; brte
br[] vyakty vci (2U); vyharatevi + [] + h[] harae (1U); trayamthe
three verbs.
1.4.2
gty udrayati ca krtayaty lapaty
api gadaty api bhaaty atra kathayaty

24
There are six types of hsya-rati: smita, hasita, vihasita, avahasita, apahasita, and atihasita. Smita
(slight smile) is when the teeth are not seen and the eyes and cheeks express joy. A smile is called
hasita when the teeth are slightly visible (Bhakti-rasmta-sindhu 4.1.14-18).
25
When ones laughing is heard and the teeth are seen, it is called vihasita (Bhakti-rasmta-sindhu
4.1.20).
gtig abde (9P); udrayatiud + r[a] prerae (10P); caand; krtayatikt[a]
saabdane (10P); lapati[] + lap[a] vyakty vci (1P); apialso; gadatigad[a]
vyakty vci (1P); apialso; bhaatibha[a] abde (1P); atraand; kathayati
katha vkya-prabandhe (10P); api also; asatians[u] hisy stutau ca (1P).

1.4.3
uktv vedayati ca kriy
adaodit
pralpe tu pralapati kutracij
uktauin the sense of speaking; vedayati[] + vid[a] vedankhyna-nivseu
(10P); caand; kriyverbs; adaaeighteen; uditmentioned; pralpein
the sense of incoherent speech; tuend of a meaning; pralapatipra + lap[a]
vyakty vci (1P); kutracitin some places; jalpatijalp[a] vyakty vci (1P); iti
thus.
1.4.4
mreayati tu dvis-trir-uktau
sajgadty api
anuvde nuvadate nuvaktty dayo
mreayaticausative of [] + mre unmde (1P); tuend of a meaning; dvi-tri-ukti
in the sense of saying two or three times; sajgadticakrapi of sam + gad[a]
vyakty vci (1P); api also; anuvdein the sense of repetition (of anothers words);
anuvadateanu + vad[a] vyakty vci (1P); anuvaktianu + vac[a] paribhae
(2P); itithus; dayaand so on; apialso; caand.
1.4.5
pahaty adhte dhyayane ikae
ikate trayam abhyasyaty manati ca
phane phayaty api
pahatipah[a] vyakty vci (1P); adhteadhi + i[] adhyayane (2A); adhyayane
in the senseof studying; ikaein the sense of learning; ikateik[a]
vidyopdne (1A); trayamthe three verbs; abhyasyatiabhi + as[u] kepae (4P);
manati[] + mn abhyse (1P) by 419; ca and; phanein the sense of
teaching; phayaticausative of pah[a] vyakty vci (1P); api also.

1.4.6
ikayaty anustti catasro
dhypayaty api
vedam cae ity-arthe vedpayati
ikayaticausative of ik[a] vidyopdne(1A); anustianu + s[u] anuiau (2P);
itithus; catasrafour; adhypayatinipta of the causative of adhi + i[] adhyayane
(2A) by 575; apialso; vedamthe Vedas; cae ity-arthein the sense of reciting;
vedpayatinma-dhtu of veda + tad cae []i, by Bhat 901; sammatamis
considered.
1.4.7
satypayati satyoktv atha
mithybhiasane
krayaty abhiapaty abhycae
satypayatinma-dhtu of satya + []i (tat karoti []i or tad cae []i), by Bhat
901; satya-uktau in the sense of speaking truthfully; athastart of a meaning;
mithy-abhiasanein the sense of making a false accusation; krayaticausative
of [] + kar[a] sacalane (1P); abhiapatiabhi + ap[a] kroe (1U); abhycae
abhi + [] + cak[i] vyakty vci (2A); abhiasatiabhi + ans[u] hisy stutau
ca (1P).
1.4.8
apaabdayati mlecchaty
apabhraayatty api
mlecchayaty apaabde syur
apabhata ity api
apaabdayatiapa + abd[a] upendra-prva vikre (10P); mlecchatimlecch[a]
avyakty vci (1P); apabhraayaticausative of apa + bhrans[u] adha-patane
(1A); itithus; apialso; mlecchayatimlecch[a] apaabde (10P); apaabdein the
sense of speaking impurely; syuare; apabhateapa + bh[a] vyakty vci
(1A); itithus; apialso.
1.4.9
apate trayam kroe apaty
kroatty api mithy-krayate tv
etad-anyathtve sakt-kte
apateap[a] kroe (1U); trayamthe three verbs; kroein the sense of scolding;
apatiap[a] kroe (1U); kroati[] + kru[a] hvne (1P); itithus; apialso;
mithy-krayatecausative of mithy + [u]k[] karae (8U); tuend of a meaning;
etat-anyathtvein the sense of speaking something other than the truth; asakt-kte
repeatedly.
1.4.10
skhalati bhreate bhree bhraatti
pada-trayam jugupsate tu nindy

skhalatiskhal[a] calane (1P); bhreatebhre[] calane (1U); bhreein the sense of

tottering; bhraatibhre[] calane (1U); itithus; pada-trayamthe three verbs;
jugupsatesvrtha-san-anta of gup[a] gopana-kutsanayo (1A) by 442; tuend of a
meaning; nindymin the sense of despising; garhategarh[a] vinindane (10P, yuj-
di); garhayatigarh[a] vinindane (10P, yuj-di); apialso.

1.4.11
kipaty tmane pi dve upakroati
nindati tath bhartsayate kutsayate

kipati[] + kip[a] prerae (6U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; dvethe

two verbs; upakroatiupa + kru[a] hvne (1P); nindatiid[i] kutsym (1P);tath
and; bhartsayate bharts[a] santarjane (10A); kutsayatekuts[a] avakepane (10A);
gajatigaj[i] abde (1P); caand; kvacitsometimes.

1.4.12
bhaya-de tarjane tarjaty atra tarjayate
pi ca
pary-apbhy vadaty eva kalakrpaka-
bhaya-dein the sense of frightening; tarjaneby scolding; tarjatitarj[a] bhartsane
(1P); atrain this regard; tarjayatetarj[a] santarjane (10A); apialso; caand; pari-
apbhymafter pari and apa; vadativad[a] vyakty vci (1P); evaonly; kalaka-
arpaka-nindanein the sense of criticism that brings about defamation.

1.4.13
uplambhe pratibhinatty uplabhata
ity api vikroati tu vikroe phut-karoty
tmane pi ca
uplambhein the sense of reproaching; pratibhinattiprati + bhid[ir] vidrae (7U);
uplabhate upa + [] + [u]labh[a] prptau (1A); itithus; apialso; vikroativi
+ kru[a] hvne (1P); tu end of a meaning; vikroein the sense of crying out,
shrieking; phut-karotiphut + [u]k[] karae (8U); tmanein the tmanepada;
apialso; caand.
1.4.1
4
stutau payate ca nauti stauty
tmane pi ca aau stavtayati

stutauin the sense of praising; payatipa[a] vyavahre stutau ca (1A), by 510;

e[a] stutau (2A); caand; nautiu stutau (2P); stautiu[] stutau (2U);
tmanein the tmanepada; api also; caand; aauthe eight verbs; stavti
u[] stutau (2U); ayati[a] stavane (10P); vandatevad[i] abhivdana-stutyo
(1A); caand; praasatipra + ans[u] hisy stutau ca (1P).

1.4.15
kvacic ca lghate ceti stutv eva
pada vidu
katthane katthate atra lghate
kvacitsometimes; caand; lghatelgh[] stutau (1A); caand; itithus; stutau
in the sense of praising; evaonly; padamthe verb; viduknowers; katthanein
the sense of boasting; katthate katth[a] tma-lghym (1A); atrain this regard;
lghatelgh[] stutau (1A); ate[] lghym (1A); apialso; caand.

1.4.16
kavate varayati ca kavitve
kavayaty api upalokayatty e
kriy lokair upastutau
kavateku[] abde (1A); varayativara vara-kriy-vistra-gua-vacaneu (10P);
caand; kavitvein the sense of describing poetically; kavayatinma-dhtu of kavi
+ tat karoti []i or tad cae []i, by Bhat 876 and 901; apialso; upalokayati
upa + lok[] saghte (1A); itithus; ethis; kriyverb; lokaiwith verses;
upastutauin the sense of invoking or praising.
1.4.17
syt pratyabhivadaty r-vda
iayaty api nibadhnti grathati ca
grathnti granthayaty api
sytis; pratyabhivadatiprati + abhi + vad[a] vyakty vci (1P); r-vdein
the sense of blessing; iayatinma-dhtu of i + tad cae []i; apialso;
nibadhntini + bandh[a] bandhane (9P); grathatigranth[a] sandarbhe (10P, yuj-
di); caand; grathntigranth[a] sandarbhe (9P); granthayatigranth[a]
sandarbhe (10P); apialso.
1.4.18
gumphane sandbhati ca gumphatti ca
a kriy samharati sakepe
saghti samasyati
gumphanein the sense of stringing together, arranging; sandbhatisam +
26
dbh[] granthe (6P); caand; gumphatigunph[a] granthe (6P) ; itithus; ca
and; asix; kriyverbs; samharatisam + [] + h[] harae (1U); sakepe
in the sense of collecting, bringing together; saghtisam + grah[a] updne
(9U); samasyatisam + as[u] kepae (4P).
1.4.19
sakipaty tmane py ets tad-bhede
yantrayaty api tath kayate ctha vistre

sakipatisam + kip[a] prerae (6U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; et

these; tat- bhedein the sense of a particular kind of bringing together; yantrayati
yatr[i] sakoce (10P); api
26
The n[um] in gunph would normally be deleted by ani-rmet viujanntnm uddhava-na-
rma-hara kasrau (343). However, the n[um] of the gunph-dis is optionally deleted when []a
follows: gunph-der na-lopa e v (Bhat 747).
also; tathand; kayateka sakocane (10P); caand; athastart of a meaning;
vistrein the sense of elaboration; saptathe seven verbs; krtitmentioned.

1.4.20
vistoti vyasyati ca vistty tanoti
ca catasra tmane py et

vistotivi + st[] cchdane (5U); vyasyativi + as[u] kepae (4P); caand;

visttivi + st[] cchdane (9U); tanoti[] + tan[u] vistre (8U); caand;
catasrafour; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; etthese verbs;
prapacayatipra + pac[i] vistra-vacane (10P); pacamthe fifth.

1.4.21
ury-rary-urarbhya ca karoti kurute
pade vykhyti vykaroty atra vycae
27
ury-rary-urarbhyaafter the words ur, r, rar, and urar ; caand; karoti
[u]k[] karae (8U); kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); padethe two verbs;
vykhytivi + [] + khy prakathane (2P); vykarotivi + [] + [u]k[] karae
(8U); atrain this regard; vycaevi + [] + cak[i] vyakty vci (2A);
arthpayatiartha upaycym (10A); apialso.
1.4.22
tath vykurute ctra vyanakti vyajayaty
api karoti prdur-virbhy vivoty
tmane py am
tathand; vykurutevi + [] + [u]k[] karae (8U); caand; atrain this regard;
vyanaktivi
+ aj[] vyakti-mrakaa-knti-gatiu (7P); vyajayaticausative of vi + aj[] vyakti-
mrakaa- knti-gatiu (7P); apialso; karoti[u]k[] karae (8U); prdur-virbhym
after the words prdur and vis; vivotivi + v[] varae (5U); tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; amthe two verbs.
1.4.23
tihate spaayati ca tath
prakaayaty api eva prakayaty atra
vivtau sphuayaty api
tihateh gati-nivttau (1P); spaayatinma-dhtu of spaa + tat karoti []i;
caand; tath and; prakaayati nma-dhtu of prakaa + tat karoti []i; api
also; evamthus; prakayati causative of pra + k[] dptau (1A); atrain this
regard; vivtauin the sense of an elucidation, clarification; sphuayatisphua
prakane (10P); apialso.
1.4.24
udghayaty udghaayaty api vyakt-
karoti ca krayaty hvayati syd
hvne kriy-dvayam
udghayatiud + gha[a] bhy bhsy v (10A); udghaayaticausative of
ud + gha[a] ceym (1A); apialso; vyakt-karotivyakta + abhta-tad-bhve vi
+ [u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; caand; krayaticausative of
[] + [u]k[] karae (8U); hvayati [] + hve[] spardhy abde ca (1U); syt
is; hvnein the sense of summoning, inviting; kriy-dvayamthe two verbs.

1.4.25
syt sahtau sahvayate spardhy
hvayate have
27
For a further discussion on the ury-dis, see vtti 777 and the footnote in the word-for-
word synonyms of
anuyukte pranayati prane jpsati
pcchati
sytis; sahtauin the sense of calling out loudly; sahvayatesam + hve[]
spardhy abde ca (1U); spardhymin the sense of rivalry; hvayatehve[]
spardhy abde ca (1U); havein the sense of calling; anuyukteanu + yuj[ir] yoge
(7U); pranayatinma-dhtu of prana + tat karoti []i; pranein the sense of
asking a question, inquiring; jpsatinipta of the san-anta y- anta-dhtu japi made
from jap[a] (jna-jpana-)mradau (10P) by 584; pcchatipracch[a] jpsym
(6P).
1.4.26
pcchate tu ytrdau
tathnujpayaty api
bhimukhyena vacane bhibravty
pcchate[] + pracch[a] jpsym (6P); tuend of a meaning; ytrdauin the
sense of a journey and so on; tathand; anujpayaticausative of anu + jap[a]
(jna-jpana-)mradau (10P); apialso; bhimukhyenadirectly in front, face to
face; vacanein the sense of speaking; abhibravtiabhi + br[] vyakty vci
(2U); abhivaktiabhi + vac[a] paribhae (2P); caand.
1.4.27
prativakty uttarayati pratyhety-
dayo pi ca vijpayati vijaptau

prativaktiprati + vac[a] paribhae (2P); uttarayatinma-dhtu of uttara + tat

28
karoti []i; pratyhaprati + br[] vyakty vci (2U) ; ity-dayaand others; api
also; caand; vijpayaticausative of vi + jap[a] (jna-jpana-)mradau
(10P); vijaptauin the sense of
informing; nivedayaticausative of ni + vid[a] jne (2P); caand; dvayamthe two
1.4.28
apahnhute pajnte nihnute
palapaty am
apahnave nircae pratycae
apahnuteapa + hnu[] apanayane (2A); apajnteapa + j avabodhane (9P);
nihnuteni + hnu[] apanayane (2A); apalapatiapa + lap[a] vyakty vci (1P);
amthese; apahnavein the sense of denying; nircaenir + [] + cak[i]
vyakty vci (2A); pratycaeprati + [] + cak[i] vyakty vci (2A); nirasyati
nir + as[u] kepae (4P).
1.4.29
saptpohati ca pratydiaty api
parsyati apkaroty tmane pi
vyudasyaty apy apsyati
saptathe seven verbs; apohatiapa + h[a] vitarke (1A); caand; pratydiati
prati + [] + di[a] atisarjane (6U); apialso; parsyatipar + as[u] kepae (4P);
apkarotiapa + [] + [u]k[] karae (8U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;
vyudasyativi + ud + as[u] kepae (4P); apialso; apsyatiapa + [] + as[u]
kepae (4P).
1.4.30
pratykhyti kapayati syt
parnudatti ca nirkaroti ca

pratykhytiprati + [] + khy prakathane (2P); kapayaticausative of kip[a]

prerae (4P, and 6U); sytis; parnudatipar + ud[a] prerane (6U); itithus; ca
and; nirkarotinir + [] + [u]k[] karae (8U); caand; parkarotipar +
[u]k[] karae (8U); caand; nirktauin the sense of refutation, rejection.

28
Bravti changes to ha by bravty-di-pacnm
hdayo v (518).
1.4.31
lucayaty apanayaty etad-bhede
vyapanayaty api upamantrayate

lucayaticausative of luc[a] apanayane (1P); apanayatiapa + [] prpae (1U);

etat-bhedein the sense of a particular way of rejecting; vyapanayativi + apa + []
prpae (1U); apialso; upamantrayateupa + matr[i] gupta-bhae (10A); caand;
upavadateupa + vad[a] vyakty vci (1P); sntvayatintv[a] sma-prayoge
(10P); apialso.
1.4.32
sntvane a smayati
tathopacchandayaty api parasmai
cnunayate nulomayati tad-bhidi
sntvanein the sense of consoling; aathe eight verbs; smayatisma sntvane
(10P); tath and; upacchandayatiupa + chad[i] savarae (10P); apialso;
parasmaiparasmaipada; caand; anunayateanu + [] prpae (1U); anulomayati
nma-dhtu of anuloma + []i, by Bhat 897; tad-bhidiin the sense of a particular
kind of consoling.
1.4.33
anuklayatti dve scayaty atra
scane tath piunayaty ea vk-
kriy-varga rita
anuklayatinma-dhtu of anukla + tat karoti []i; itithus; dvethe two verbs;
scayatisca paiunye (10P); atrain this regard; scanein the sense of
indicating; tathand; piunayati nma-dhtu of piuna + tat karoti []i; eathis;
vk-kriy-vargasection on the functions of speech; ritaproclaimed.

iti vacana-kriy-
varga
itithus ends; vacana-kriy-vargathe section on the functions
of speech.

Now we begin the section on the functions of

speech.
1.4.3
Uktau
cae, vakti, vadati, lapayati, khyti, bhate, abhidhatte, abhidadhti, brte,
bravti, vyharate, vyaharati, gti, udrayati, krtayati, lapati, gadati, bhaati,
kathayati, asati, and vedayati mean to speak (intelligible words).

1.4.3
Pralpe
Pralapati and sometimes jalpati mean to speak
incoherently.
1.4.4
Dvis-trir-uktau
mreayati and sajgadi mean to repeat (a word or a sentence) two or
three times.
1.4.4
Anuvde
29
Anuvadate , anuvakti and similar verbs mean to repeat (after hearing from an
authority).
29
Anor akarmakt tatra, tmapada endings are applied after anu + vad when it is akarmaka (Bhat
1152). For example:
1.4.5
Adhyayane
Pahati and adhte mean to read,
study.
1.4.5
ikae
ikate, abhyasyati, and manati mean to
learn.
1.4.5
Phane
Phayati, ikayati, anusti, and adhypayati mean to
lecture, teach.
1.4.6
Vedam cae ity-arthe
Vedpayati means to recite the
Vedas.
1.4.7
Satyoktau
Satypayati means to speak
truthfully.
1.4.7
Mithybhiasane
krayati, abhiapati, abhycae, and abhiasati mean to make a false
accusation.
1.4.8
Apaabde
Apaabdayati, mlecchati, apabhraayati, mlecchayati, and apabhate mean to utter
bad or vulgar speech, or any language except Sanskrit.

1.4.9
kroe
apate, apati, and kroati mean to
scold.
1.4.9
Etad-anyathtve sakt-kte
ithy-krayate means to lie
repeatedly.
1.4.10
Bhree
Skhalati, bhreate, and bhraati mean to have a slip of the tongue, to
falter in speech.
1.4.10
Nindym
Jugupsate, garhate, garhayati, garhayate, kipati, kipate, upakroati, nindati, and
sometimes also

1.4.12
Bhaya-de tarjane
Tarjati and tarjayate mean to frighten by
scolding.
1.4.12
Kalakrpaka-nindane
Parivadati and apavadati mean to
defame.
1.4.13
Uplambhe
Pratibhinatti and uplabhate mean to
reproach.
1.4.13
Vikroe
Vikroati, phut-karoti, and phut-kurute mean to cry for help,
30
shriek.
1.4.14
Stutau
31
Payati, e, nauti, stauti, stute, stavti , ayati, vandate, praasati, and
sometimes also lghate

1.4.15
Katthane
Katthate, lghate, and ate mean to
boast.
1.4.16
Kavitve
Kavate, varayati, and kavayati mean to describe
poetically.
1.4.16
lokair upastutau
Upalokayati means to invoke or praise with
verses.
1.4.17
ir-vda
Pratyabhivadati and iayati mean to
bless.
1.4.18
Gumphane
Nibadhnti, grathati, grathnti, granthayati, sandbhati, and gumphati mean to
string words or phrases together.

1.4.18
Sakepe
Samharati, saghti, samasyati, sakipati, and sakipate mean to collect, compile,
summarize.
1.4.19
Tad-bhede
Yantrayati and kayate mean to bind,
restrict.
1.4.19
Vistre
Vistoti, vistute, vyasyati, vyasyate, vistti, vistte, tanoti, tanute, and
prapacayati mean to elaborate as do karoti and kurute when connected with the
avyayas ur, r, urar, and rar.

30
For example, Raghuntha dsa Gosvm writes: bakabhid-vartmapa-gae kuru tva phut-krn avati
sa yath tv mana ita (r mana-ik 5).
31
In Bha-vtti and other compositions, we see stavti (alternate acyuta pa. 1.1 form of u[] stutau)
and stuvta
(alternate acyuta pa. 1.2 form of u[] stutau) because in tu-ru-stu-amy-ama srvadhtuke
(Adhyy 7.3.95) [] is applied even when the ka-dhtuka beginning with a viujana is not
pthu. But this is only done in the Vedas: tu-ru-stu- amy-ama srvadhtuke ity atrpthv ap
1.4.23
Vivtau
Vykhyti, vykaroti, vycae, arthpayati, vykurute, vyanakti, vyajayati,
32
prdurkaroti, prdurkurute, vikaroti, vikurute, vivoti, vivute, tihate ,
spaayati, prakaayati, prakayati, sphuayati, udghayati, udghaayati, and
vyakt-karoti mean to clarify, explain.
1.4.24
hvne
krayati, and hvayati mean to invite,
summon.
1.4.25
Sahtau
Sahvayate means to call out
loudly.
1.4.25
Spardhy have ca
Hvayate means to rival and to
call.
1.4.25
Prane
Anuyukte, pranayati, jpsati, and pcchati mean to ask,
inquire.
1.4.26
Ytrdau prane
33
pcchate and anujpayati mean to ask permission to leave (for a journey
and so on).
1.4.26
bhimukhyena vacane
Abhibravti, abhivakti, prativakti, uttarayati, pratyha, and others mean to speak face
to face, reply.

1.4.27
Vijaptau
Vijpayati and nivedayati mean to
inform.
1.4.28
Apahnave
Apahnute, apajnte, nihnute, and apalapati mean
to deny.
1.4.30
Nirktau
Nircae, pratycae, nirasyati, nirasyate, apohati, apohate, pratydiati,
pratydiate, parsyati, parsyate, apkaroti, apkurute, vyudasyati, vyudasyate,
apsyati, apsyate, pratykhyti, kapayati,and parnudati, nirkaroti, parkaroti,
35
lucayati, and apanayati mean to refute, reject.
1.4.31
Etad-
bhede
32
Stho nirtau prakane pratijym, After the dhtu h, tmapada endings are applied when
there is nirti (examination of the subject of disagreement), prakana (revealing ones own
interests) or pratij (making a solemn declaration, making a promise, or agreeing,
acknowledging) (Bhat 1128).
33
tmapada endings are applied after [] + pracch[a] jpsym (6P) by the stra naute pcche
c yadi prvata
(Bhat 1120).
34
The first two mean to speak face to face and the rest mean to reply.
35
The tmapada endings are used in nirasyate, apohate, paryate, vyudasyate, and apsyate by
Vyapanayati means to
banish.
1.4.32
Sntvane
36
Upamantrayate, upavadate , sntvayati, smayati, upacchandayati, anunayate, and
anunayati mean to console.

1.4.32
Tad-bhidi
Anulomayati and anuklayati mean to speak favorably, be
friendly.
1.4.33
Scane
Scayati and piunayati mean to slander,
reveal.
Here ends the section on the functions of
speech.

Dhvani-kriy-
varga
1.5.1
ravti rauti nadati dhvanati dhvanayaty
api abdyate svanati ca dhvanv

ravtiru abde (2P); rautiru abde (2P); nadatiad[a] avyakte abde (1P); dhvanati
dhvan[a] abde (1P); dhvanayatidhvana abde (10P); apialso; abdyatenma-
dhtu of abda + [k]ya[], by 613; svanatisvan[a] abde (1P); caand; dhvanauin
the sense of making a sound; aauthe eight verbs; raatira[a] abde (1P); api
also.
1.5.2
rambhate rebhate abde gavm ukas
tu nardati
meghasya tu stanayati tath rasati
rambhaterabh[i] gav abde (1A); rebhaterebh[] abde (1A); abdein the sense
of the sound; gavmof cows; ukaof bulls; tuend of a meaning; nardati
nard[a] abde (1P); meghasyaof a cloud; tuend of a meaning; stanayatistana
deva-abde (10P); tathand; rasati ras[a] abde (1P); garjatigarj[a] abde (1P).

1.5.3
sphrjaty aani-nirghoe bhme
ghurati garjati pryo mga-
khagdn nde kjati gujati
sphrjati[u][o]sphrj[] vajra-nirghoe (1P); aani-nirghoein the sense of the
sound of the thunderbolt; bhmein the sense of frightening; ghuratighur[a]
bhmrtha-abdayo (6P); garjati garj[a] abde (1P); pryagenerally; mga-
khagdnmof deer, birds, and so on; ndein the sense of the sound; kjati
kj[a] avyakte abde (1P); gujatiguj[i] avyakte abde (1P).
1.5.4
vde kvaati prya kavate kauti
karkae
bhaate bukkayati ca bukkatti uno
36
tmapada endings are applied after upa + vad[a] vyakty vci (1P) when there are the
meanings of yatna (effort, exertion), upasntvana (consoling, appeasing), jna, bhsana
(shining), upamantraa (alluring, seducing), and vimati (difference of opinions, disagreement)
(Bhat 1150).
vdeof a lute and so on; kvaatikva[a] abde (1P); pryagenerally; kavate
ku[] abde (1A); kautiku abde (2P); karkaein the sense of a rough, harsh noise,
37
any noise; bhaate bha[a] bhartsane (1P) ; bukkayatibukk[a] bhaae (10U) (or
vukk[a]); caand; bukkati
bukk[a] bhaae (1P) (or vukk[a]); itithus; unaof a dog; dhvanauin the
1.5.5
riti reate vrke tirac
vyate dhvanau
kurati ghuratty rte ghore
ritir gatau reae ca (9P); reatere[] avyakte abde (1A); vrkein regards
to a wolf; tiracmof animals; vyatev[] abde (4A); dhvanauin the sense of
the sound; kuratikur abde (6P); ghuratighur[a] bhmrtha-abdayo (6P); iti
thus; rtein regards to someone in distress; ghoreterrifying or frightful; dhvkati
dhvks[i] kkym ghora-vite ca (1A); vitein the sense of the noise of
animals.
1.5.6
heate hreate vn hastin
bhatti ca buk-krayati sihnm
utkah-svana nute
heatehe[] ava-abde (1A); hreatehre[] avyakte abde (1A); avnmof
horses; hastinmof elephants; bhatibh[i] vddhau (1P); itithus; caand; buk-
krayatinma- dhtu of buk-kra + tat karoti []i; sihnmof lions; utkah-
svanein the sense of a sound of longing or regret; nute[] + u stutau (2P).

1.5.7
nikjati tu sakraty ete akaa-
ghoae
hikkate hikkatti dve hikky kauti
nikjatinir + kj[a] avyakte abde (1P); tuend of a meaning; sakratisam +
kr[] vihre (1P); etethese two; akaa-ghoaein the sense of the sound of a
carriage; hikkatehikk[a] hikkym (1U); hikkatihikk[a] hikkym (1U); itithus; dve
the two verbs; hikkymin the sense of hiccuping; kauti[u]ku abde(2P); tu
end of a meaning; kutein the sense of sneezing.
1.5.8
ksate kapha-je abde saurate
maatty ada
kauke kardaty apnotthe pardate
ksateks[] ksa-roga-abde (1A); kapha-jeproduced from phlegm; abdein the
sense of sound; sauratein the sense of erotic enjoyment; maatima[a] abde
(1P); itithus; adathe verb; kaukerelating to the belly; kardatikard[a] kutsite
abde (1P); apna-utthearising from the air that goes downwards and out of the
anus; pardatepard[a] kutsite abde (apna-abda ity artha) (1A); ardhate
dh[u] apna-abde (1A); padethe two verbs.
1.5.9
ct-karoti kre-karoti ratha-krmukayo
kramt dve tmane pi bhde ikte
gte gyatti
ct-karotict + [u]k[] karae (8U); kre-karotikre + [u]k[] karae (8U); ratha-
krmukayoin regard to a chariot and a bow; kramtsequentially; dvethe two
verbs; tmane

37
The same reading bhaate is found in khyta-candrik (1.5.2). The dhtu bha[a] is parapad in
Pinis Dhtu-pha as well as in Jva Gosvms. One could infer that this dhtu might be tmapad
in another Dhtu-pha such as that of the Kalpa-vykaraa, or Vopadevas (Mugdha-bodha-
vykaraa). Otherwise perhaps it is a spelling mistake for bhaati.
Apte dictionary lists bhaati but Monier-Williams lists both bhaati and bhaate. Mdhavy dhtu-
in the tmanepada; apialso; bh-deof ornaments and so on; ikteij[i]
bhaa-dhvanau
(2A); gtein the sense of singing; gyatigai abde (1P); itithus.
1.5.10
upavayatty etad upagne hi
vay udghoaty utkae abde
nirghoati ca hrdate
upavayatinma-dhtu of upav + []i, by Bhat 898; itithus; etatthe verb;
upagnein the sense of an accompanying song (harmony); hiindeed; vay
using a v; udghoatiud + ghu[ir] abde (1P); utkae abdein the sense of an
excessive, abounding, or rich sound, or a sound exceeding the usual measure;
nirghoatinir + ghu[ir] abde (1P); caand; hrdatehrd[a] avyakte abde (1A).

1.5.11
ut-prv abda-vcinya kriy ucca-
svane mat prati-prv pratidhvne
abda-vargo yam rita
ut-prvpreceded by ud; abda-vcinyawhich denote sounds; kriyverbs;
ucca-svanein the sense of high-pitched or loud sound; matare considered; prati-
prvpreceded by prati; pratidhvnein the sense of an echo; abda-varga
section on sound; ayamthis; rita explained.

iti dhvani-kriy-
varga
itithus ends; dhvani-kriy-vargathe section on
making noises.
atra bhva-vikr dhiym icchdi-
karmam vc tat-sagatn ca
paryy prya rit
atrain this chapter; bhva-vikrmof the transformations of existence; dhiymof
the intelligence; icch-di-karmamof the activities of desiring and so on; vcmof
speech; tat- sagatnmin conjunction with speech; caand; paryysynonyms;
pryafor the most part; ritdescribed.

iti prayuktkhyta-majary prathama

ka
itithus ends; prayuktkhyta-majarymin Prayuktkhyta-majar; prathama
first; ka
chapter.

Now we begin the section on making

noises.
1.5.1
Dhvanau
Ravti, rauti, nadati, dhvanati, dhvanayati, abdyate, svanati, and raati mean to
make a sound.
1.5.2
Gavm uka abde
Rambhate, rebhate, and nardati mean to
moo.
1.5.2
Meghasya abde
Stanayati, rasati, and garjati mean to rumble (in regard to
clouds).
1.5.3
Aani-nirghoe
Sphrjati means to
thunder.
1.5.3
Bhme nde
Ghurati and garjati generally mean to frighten with
cries.
1.5.3
Mga-khagdn nde
Kjati and gujati mean to cry, chirp, buzz, utter inarticulate
sound.
1.5.4
Vde nde
Kvaati means to sound, resound (generally used to describe the noise made
by a musical instrument such as a v or a flute).

1.5.4
Karkae
Kavate and kauti generally mean to make a harsh
noise.
1.5.4
uno dhvanau
Bhaate, bukkayati, and bukkati mean to bark,
growl.
1.5.5
Vrke
Riti and reate mean to
howl.
1.5.5
Tirac dhvanau
Vyate means to sound (in regard to animals), i.e to bellow, bleat,
snort, etc.
1.5.5
rte
Kurati and ghurati mean to
moan.
1.5.5
Ghore vite
Dhvkati means to make a terrifying noise (in regard to
animals).
1.5.6
Avn dhvanau
Heate and hreate mean to
neigh.
1.5.6
Hastin dhvanau
Bhati means to roar (in regard to
elephants).
1.5.6
Sihn dhvanau
Buk-krayati means to
roar.
1.5.
6
Utkahsvane
nute means to lament,
38
weep.
1.5.7
akaa-ghoae
Nikjati and sakrati mean to rattle (in regard to a
carriage).
1.5.7
Hikkym
Hikkate and hikkati mean to
hiccup.
1.5.7
Kute
Kauti means to
sneeze.
1.5.8
Kapha-je abde
Ksate means to
cough.
1.5.8
Saurate abde
Maati means to make sound (in regard to erotic
enjoyment).
1.5.8
Kauke abde
Kardati means to rumble, growl (in regard to the
stomach).
1.5.8
Apnotthe abde
Pardate and ardhate mean to
fart.
1.5.9
Ratha-krmukayo abde
Ct-karoti and ct-kurute mean to rattle (in regard to a chariot). Kre-karoti and kre-
39
kurute mean to twang (in regard to a bow).

1.5.9
Bhde abde
ikte means to tinkle,
jingle.
1.5.9
Gte
Gyati means to
sing.
1.5.10
Upagne
Upavayati means to provide musical accompaniment
with a lute.
1.5.10
Utkae abde
Udghoati, nirghoati, and hrdate mean to make an excessive, abounding, or
rich sound.
38
tmapada endings are applied after [] + u stutau (2P) by the stra naute pcche c yadi
prvata (Bhat 1120). For example: nute kroatty artha, nute means He laments, weeps
(Bhat vtti 1120).
39
Ct and kre are rad-dis, which signify that they are anukaraa-abdas (imitative sounds) (vtti
1.5.11
Ucca-svane
Verbs of sound, when preceded by the upendra ud, mean to make a high-pitched or
loud sound.
1.5.11
Pratidhvne
Verbs of sound, when preceded by the upendra prati, mean to make
an echo.
Here ends the section on the varieties of
sound.
In this chapter, the modifications of existence, the functions of intelligence, the
activities of desiring and so on, the functions of speech, and the various sounds
connected with speech have been described for the most part.

Here ends the first chapter of Prayuktkhyta-

majar.

Dvitya
ka
2.1.1
athocyante n-viprdi-ce vargai samsata
prasagato ny paryyai kramn nr-di-

athanow; ucyanteare said; n-vipra-di-cethe activities of men, brhmaas,

and so on; vargaiby sections; samsataby summarizing; prasagataaccording
to the context; any other things; paryyaiwith synonyms; kramt
progressively; n-di-pada-tmakaithat have the meaning of the words n and so
on.

Manuya-ce-
varga
2.1.2
rambhe prakramate prastautty
tmane pi ca atraivrabhate

rambhein the sense of beginning; prakramatepra + kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P), by

724; prastautipra + u[] stutau (2U); itithus; tmanein the tmanepada; api
also; caand; atra here; evaonly; rabhate[] + rabh[a] rbhasye (1A); caand;
upakramateupa + kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P), by 724; atrahere; catuayamthe
four verbs.
2.1.3
praktnustau cnubadhnty
udghtayaty api
ktau karoti kurute vidhatte vidadhti
prakta-anustauin the sense of following what has been begun; caand;
anubadhntianu + bandh[a] bandhane (9P); udghtayaticausative of ud + han[a]
his-gatyo (2P) by 197, 577; api also; ktauin the sense of doing, making; karoti
[u]k[] karae (8U); kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); vidhattevi + [u]dh[]
dhraa-poaayo (3U); vidadhtivi + [u]dh[] dhraa- poaayo (3U); ca
and.
2.1.4
tanute vitanoty atra sjaty
utpdayaty api nirmimte
tanutetan[u] vistre (8U); vitanotivi + tan[u] vistre (8U); atrain this regard;
sjatisj[a] visarge (6P); utpdayaticausative of ud + pad[a] gatau (4A); apialso;
nirmimtenir + m[] mne (3A), by 535 and 523; bhvayaticausative of bh
sattym (1P); nirmtinir + m mne (2P); racayatiraca pratiyatne (10P); apialso.

2.1.5
nipdayati nirvartayati sdhayatti
ca anutihaty carati raddh-
yukte tu sjyate
nipdayaticausative of nir + pad[a] gatau (4A); nirvartayaticausative of nir +
vt[u] vartane
(1A); sdhayaticausative of sdh[a] sasiddhau (4P, and 5P); itithus; caand;
anutihatianu
+ h gati-nivttau (1P); carati[] + car[a] gatau (1P); raddh-yuktein the
2.1.6
uttihate tu ghaate cey
sapta ceate vyyacchate
vypriyate pravartata ihehate
uttihateud + h gati-nivttau (1P); tuend of a meaning; ghaategha[a]
ceym (1A); ceymin the sense of endeavoring; saptathe seven verbs;
ceatece[a] ceym (1A); vyyacchatevi + [] + yam[u] uparame (1P), by
399 and Bhat 1172; vypriyatevi + [] + pr[] prtau (4A); pravartatepra +
vt[u] vartane (1A); ihahere; hateh[a] ce-vchayo (1A).
2.1.7
vi-utsarge tu guvati hadate
thvamehati
mtrae mtrayati ca prasravaty api
vi-utsargein the sense of evacuating something; tuend of a meaning; guvatigu
purotsarge (6P); hadatehad[a] purotsarge (1A); athastart of a meaning;
avamehatiava + mih[a] secane (1P); mtraein the sense of urinating; mtrayati
mtra prasravae (10P); caand; prasravati pra + sru gatau (1P); apialso; ca
and; trayamthe three verbs.
2.1.8
unmry udvartane cotsdayaty
udvartayaty api dvaya taldibhir lepe
mrakayaty abhyanakti ca
unmriud + mj[] uddhau (2P); udvartanein the sense of rubbing, massaging;
caand; utsdayaticausative of ud + ad[] viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu (1P and 6P);
udvartayaticausative of ud + vt[u] vartane (1A); apialso; dvayamthe two verbs;
tala-dibhiwith the hands and so on; lepein the sense of smearing; mrakayati
mrak[a] mrakane (10P); abhyanaktiabhi + aj[] vyakti-mrakaa-knti-gatiu (7P);
caand.
2.1.9
paridhne paridadhty atra
savastrayaty api cchdayati vaste ca
paridhatte ca pacakam
paridhnein the sense of wearing; paridadhtipari + [u]dh[] dhraa-
poaayo (3U); atra
in this regard; savastrayatinma-dhtu of savastra + tat karoti []i; apialso;
cchdayati[]
+ chad[a] savarae (10P); vastevas[a] cchdane (2A); caand; paridhatte
2.1.10
ka-bandhe ghaayati tath
parikaroty api
prvtau pracchdayati tathtra
prvoty api
ka-bandhein the sense of tying around the waist; ghaayaticausative of gha[a]
ceym (1A); tathand; parikarotipari + [u]k[] karae (8U); apialso;
prvtauin the sense of covering; pracchdayatipra + chad[a] savarae (10P);
tathand; atrain this regard; prvotipra + [] + v[] varae (5U); apialso.

2.1.11
anulimpati carcym upadegdhy tmane
py ubhe carcayaty atha bhdi-
grahae pratimucati
anulimpatianu + lip[a] upadehe (6U); carcymin the sense of anointing;
upadegdhiupa + dih[a] pralepe (2U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; ubhe
the two verbs; carcayatinma- dhtu of carc + tat karoti []i; athastart of a
meaning; bhdi-grahaein the sense of wearing ornaments and so on; pratimucati
prati + muc[] mokae (6U).
2.1.12
mucaty tmane py et pinahyaty
apinahyati parikaroti bhym

mucati[] + muc[] mokae (6U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; et

these; pinahyatiapi + ah[a] bandhane (4U) by 531; apinahyatiapi + ah[a]
bandhane (4U); parikarotipari + [u]k[] karae (8U) by 559; bhymin the
sense of decorating; tmanein the tmanepada; alakarotialam + [u]k[] karae
(8U); apialso.
2.1.13
maati maayati ca bhayaty api
bhati prasdhayaty athottasaty
avatase vatasati
maatima[i] bhym (1P); maayatima[i] bhym (10P); caand;
bhayatibh[a] alakre (10P); apialso; bhatibh[a] alakre (1P);
prasdhayaticausative of pra + sdh[a] sasiddhau (4P, and 5P); athastart of a
meaning; uttasatiud + tas[i] alakre (1P); avatase in the sense of adorning;
avatasatiava + tas[i] alakre (1P).
2.1.14
anakti kajjalayati vjane
vjayaty atha surabh-kurute
dhpayati vsayatty api
anaktiaj[] vyakti-mrakaa-knti-gatiu (7P); kajjalayatinma-dhtu of kajjala +
tat karoti []i; vjanein the sense of fanning; vjayativj[a] (10U) see Aptes
Practical Sanskrit English Dictionary; athastart of a meaning; surabh-kurute
surabhi + abhta-tad-bhve vi + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612;
dhpayatinma-dhtu of dhpa + tat karoti []i; vsayativsa guntardhne
(10P); itithus; apialso.
2.1.15
caksti bhsate bhti rocate ca
prakate obhate bhrjate rjaty
tmane py atra dvyati
caksticaks[] dptau (2P); bhsatebhs[] dptau (1A); bhtibh dptau (2P);
rocateruc[a] dptau (1A); caand; prakatepra + k[] dptau (1A); obhate
ubh[a] dptau (1A); bhrjate [u]bhrj[] dptau (1A); rjatirj[] dptau (1U);
tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; atrain this regard; dvyatidiv[u] kr-
vijig-vyavahra-dyuti-stuti-knti-gatiu (4P).
2.1.1
6
dpyate dyotate dptau jvalaty
ullasatty api
naane nayaty atra traya naati
dpyatedp[] dptau (4A); dyotatedyut[a] dptau (1A); dptauin the sense of
shining; jvalati jval[a] dptau (1P); ullasatiud + las[a] krym (1P); itithus; api
also; naanein the sense of dancing, acting; nayaticausative of na[a] ntau
(1P); atrain this regard; trayamthe three verbs; naatina[a] ntau (1P); ntyati
nt[] gtra-vikepe (4P).
2.1.17
hilatti tu hve tha kumrayati
khelati viharaty tmane py atra tath
krati dvyati
hilatihil bhva-karae (6P); itithus; tuend of a meaning; hvein the sense of
calling, alluring, expressing amorous inclination; athastart of a meaning; kumrayati
kumra krym (10P); khelatikhel[] vihre (1P); viharativi + h[] harae (1U);
tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; atrain this regard; tathand; krati
kr[] vihre (1P); dvyatidiv[u] kr-vijig- vyavahra-dyuti-stuti-knti-gatiu
(4P).
2.1.18
khelyatha lalati ramate vilasaty api
o nu-sam-paribhya ca krate
kranrthak
khelyatinma-dhtu of khel (kav-di); ihahere; lalatila[a] vilse (1P);
ramateram[u] krym (1A); vilasativi + las[a] krym (1P); apialso; a
after []; anu-sam- paribhyaafter anu, sam, or pari; caalso; kratekr[]
vihre (1P); krana-arthakhave the meaning of playing, sporting.

2.1.19
krdate pluti-khelym athnukarae
trayam viambayaty anukaroty tmane
nuharaty ada
krdatekrd[a] krym eva (1A); pluti-khelymin the sense of leaping, jumping;
athastart of a meaning; anukaraein the sense of an imitation; trayamthe three
40
verbs; viambayativi + ab[i] (10P) ; anukarotianu + [u]k[] karae (8U);
tmanein the tmanepada; anuharati
anu + h[] harae (1U); adathe verb.
2.1.20
bhavet pratinidhatte tu sdye
trnukalpate rigati skhalatty e
skhalane syt kriy-dvay
bhavetis; pratinidhatteprati + ni + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); tubut;
sdyein the sense of being similar; atrain this regard; anukalpateanu + kp[]
smarthye (1A);
rigatirig[i] gatau (1P); skhalatiskhal sacalane (1P); itithus; ethis; skhalane
in the sense of tottering, stumbling; sytis; kriy-dvaythe two verbs.
2.1.21
tare tyaty am dhitsaty
udanyati pipsati pibaty cmati

tarein the sense of being thirsty; tyati[i]t[] pipsym (4P); amthese;

dhitsatisan-anta of dhe[] pne (1A) by 584; udanyatinma-dhtu of udaka +
[k]ya[n], by Bhat 866; pipsatisan- anta of p pane (1P); pibatip pane (1P);
cmati[] + cam[u] adane (1P) by 396; dhayati

40
According to Monier-Williams, the dhtu dab[i] (10P) can be found in Vopadevas
dhtu-pha.
dhe[] pne (1P); atrain this regard; pnein the sense of drinking; caand;
pyatep[] pne
(4A).
2.1.22
kahina-dravya-sambaddha-rasa-
pne tu cati bubhukate kudhyati ca
jighatsaty aanyati
kahinafirm; dravyasubstance; sambaddhacombined with; rasaliquid; pnein
the sense of drinking; tuend of a meaning; catic[a] pne (1P); bubhukate
san-anta of bhuj[a] planbhyavahrayo (7P); kudhyatikudh[a] bubhukym (4P);
caand; jighatsatisan-anta of ghas[] adane (1P); aanyatinma-dhtu of aana +
[k]ya[n], by Bhat 866.
2.1.23
jamaty anti carati bhakayaty atti
khdati bhukte toti taroti

jamatijam[u] adane (1P); antia[a] bhojane (9P); caraticar[a] gatau (1P);

bhakayati bhak[a] adane (10P); attiad[a] bhakae (2P); khdatikhd[]
bhakae (1P); bhuktebhuj[a] planbhyavahrayo (7U); totit[u] adane (8U);
41
tarotit[u] adane (8U) ; tathand; abhyavaharatiabhi + ava + h[] harae
(1U); apialso.
2.1.24
tmane ca traya psti jakiti pratyavasyati
upayukte ca bhuktau syur danta-cchede
tu carvati
tmanein the tmanepada; caand; trayamthe three verbs; pstips bhakae
(2P); jakiti jak[a] bhaka-hasanayo (2P); pratyavasyatiprati + ava + o anta-
karmai (4P); upayukteupa + yuj[ir] yoge (7U); caand; bhuktauin the sense of
eating; syuare; danta-cchedein the sense of cutting with the teeth; tuend of a
meaning; carvaticarv[a] adane (1P).
2.1.25
sa-hvanau vivaaty ava tath
cvavaaty api
nigre tu gilaty atra grasate nigiraty
sa-hvanauwhile making sound; vivaativi + svan[a] abde (1P); avathe upendra
ava; tath like that; caand; avavaatiava + svan[a] abde (1P); apialso;
nigrein the sense of swallowing, devouring; tuend of a meaning; gilatig
nigarae (6P); atrain this regard; grasate gras[u] adane (1A); nigiratini + g
nigarae (6P); apialso.
2.1.26
dandayate dandati dandaty atra
garhite dae viuddhe daati tath
daayate dvayam
dandayateya-anta of dan[a] daane (1P); dandaticakrapi of dan[a]
daane (1P); dandaticakrapi of dan[a] daane (1P); atrain this regard;
garhitein the sense of contemptibility; dae viuddhein the sense of pure biting;
daatidan[a] daane (1P); tath and; daayateda[i] daane (10A); dvayam
the two verbs.
2.1.27
apasmaraty apasmre vireke tu
viricyate karma-kartary asau tatra
bhaved atisaraty api

41
Taroti is an optional form of the dhtu t[u] adane (8U), since the uddhava -rma of a dhtu
can optionally take
apasmaratiapa + sm cintym (1P); apasmrein the sense of forgetting or
convulsing; virekein the sense of a purgative; tuend of a meaning; viricyatevi +
ric[ir] virecane (7U); karma-kartari in karma-kartari prayoga (639); asauthe verb;
tatrain that regard; bhavetis; atisaratiati + s gatau (1P); apialso.

2.1.28
vntau vamaty udgirati cchardayaty
udgilaty api nihvyatti tht-kre

vntauin the sense of vomiting; vamati[u]vam[a] udgirae (1P); udgiratiud + g

nigarae (6P); chardayatichard[a] vamane (10P); udgilatiud + g nigarae (6P); api
also; nihvyatini + hiv[u] nirasane (4P); itithus; tht-krein the sense of
spitting; dvayamthe two verbs; nihvatini + hiv[u] nirasane (1P); itithus; api
also.
2.1.29
ee pariinati dvitaya
eayaty api

eein the sense of being a remainder; pariinaipari + i[] vieae (7P); iti
thus; dvitayam the two verbs; eayatii[a] asarvopayoge (10P); apithus; tptau
in the sense of satisfaction, satiation; tpyatitp[a] prane (4P); tpnotitp[u]
tarpae (5P); suhit-bhavatisuhita + abhta- tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by
776, 1276, 1277, and 612; itithus; apialso.
2.1.30
virmyatti virntau kvacid
viramate matam ste niviate
copaviaty atra nidati
virmyativi + ram[u] tapasi khede ca (4P), trivikrama by 541; itithus; virntauin
the sense of resting; kvacitsometimes; viramatevi + ram[u] tapasi khede ca (4P);
matamis considered; stes[a] upaveane vidyamnaty ca (2A); niviateni +
vi[a] praveane (6P), tmapada by Bhat 1115; caand; upaviatiupa + vi[a]
praveane (6P); atrain this regard; nidatini + ad[] viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu
(6P) by 419.
2.1.31
rdhv-bhavati cottihaty rdhvatve
tihatty api anukrmati paryeti

rdhv-bhavatirdhva + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276,

1277, and 612; ca and; uttihatiud + h gati-nivttau (1P), by 419 and 421;
rdhvatvein the sense of becoming vertical; tihatih gati-nivttau (1P), by 419;
itithus; apialso; anukrmatianu + kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P), trivikrama by 398;
paryetipari + i[] gatau (2P); paryatepari + [] gatau (4A); itithus; kramein
the sense of a following in sequence.
2.1.32
dne sv-karoty atra ghty apy
tmane dvayam updatte ghayate lti
a syu pratcchati
dnein the sense of taking, receiving; sv-karotisva + abhta-tad-bhve vi +
[u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; atrain this regard; ghti
grah[a] updne (9U); apialso; tmanein the tmanepada; dvayamthe two
verbs; updatteupa + [] + [u]d[] dne (3U);
42
ghayategha grahae (10A); ltil dne (2P) ; athe six verbs; syuare;
pratcchatiprati +
42
The same dhtu l dne is sometimes understood to mean l dne because, in the Devangar
script, spaces are not important. Therefore, ldne can be understood as l dne or l dne. Bhad-
dhtu-kusumkara confirms this logic by
2.1.33
tyge tyajaty utsjati jahty ujjhati
mucati utsjyate visjati mucate

tygein the sense of abandoning; tyajatityaj[a] hnau (1P); utsjatiud + sj[a]

visarge (6P); jahti[o]h[k] tyge (3P); ujjhatiudjh[a] utsarge (6P); mucati
muc[] mokae (6U); utsjyateud + sj[a] visarge (4A); visjativi + sj[a]
visarge (6P); mucatemuc[] mokae (6U); rahayatiraha tyge (10P); apialso.

2.1.34
tmane syt pariharaty atra
mokayatty api
varjane vrayaty atra syn
tmanein the tmanepada; sytis; pariharatipari + h[] harae (1U); atrain this
regard; mokayatimok[a] asane (10P); itithus; apialso; varjanein the sense of
excluding, avoiding; vrayaticausative of v[] varae (9U); atrain this regard; syt
is; nivrayaticausative of ni + v[] varae (9U); itithus; caand.

2.1.35
tath vakti vkte ca vysedhati
niedhati varjayaty api saptait
varae varayaty ada
tathand; vaktivj[] varjane (7P); vktevj[] varjane (2A); caand;
vysedhativi + [] + idh[u] gatym (1P); niedhatini + idh[u] gatym (1P);
varjayativj[] varjane (10P, yuj-di); apialso; saptaseven verbs; etthese;
varaein the sense of choosing; varayativ[] varae (10U); adathe verb.

2.1.36
vvtyate votti vtty tmane
py ubhe dhatte ca nidhatte ca
43
vvtyatevvt[u] varae (4A) ; votiv[] varae (5U); itithus; vti
v[] varae (9U); itithus; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; ubhethe two
verbs; dhatte[] + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); caand; nidhatteni
+ [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); caand; nidadhtini + [u]dh[]
dhraa-poaayo (3U); dadhti[] + [u]dh[] dhraa- poaayo (3U); ca
and.
2.1.37
ropayaty arpayati nyasyatti
tathrpae vinyasyatti tad-
bhede sanniveayatti ca
ropayaticausative of [] + ruh[a] janmani prdur-bhve ca (1P), by Bhat 801;
arpayati causative of gatau prpae ca (1P) or gatau (3P), by 571; nyasyatini
+ as[u] kepae (4P); iti thus; tathand; arpaein the sense of offering,
entrusting; vinyasyativi + ni + as[u] kepae (4P); itithus; tat-bhedein the sense
of a particular kind of offering; sanniveayaticausative of sam + ni + vi[a]
praveane (6P); itithus; caand.
2.1.3
8
listing l dne. This is also the case with the dhtu r dne. For instance, while explaining the word
viu-rtam, Santana Gosvm writes: ata eva viun garbhe praviena bhagavat rta
brahmstrato rakitv r-yudhihirdibhyo dattam, yadvtta sv-ktam iti tasypi parama-
bhgavatatvam uktam (Bhad-vaiava-toa 10.1.14).
43
Mdhavy dhtu-vtti gives an example: tato vvtyamn s rma-l nyavikata (Bhai-
kvya 4.28). The verb
karoti haste-pibhy kurute
copayacchate vivahaty udvahati

karoti[u]k[] karae (8U); haste-pibhymafter the words haste or pau (both

meaning hand; both are ury-dis by vtti 777); kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); caand;
upayacchateupa + yam[u] uparame (1P); vivahativi + vah[a] prpae (1U); udvahati
ud + vah[a] prpae (1U); ca and; udvhein the sense of marrying; pariayati
pari + [] prpae (1U); apialso.
2.1.39
catvri ctmane jyehe nhe tra
parivindati coayaty cuati dvayam
etan nakha-kate
catvrifour; caand; tmanein the tmanepada; jyehewhen the elder brother;
anhehas not yet married; atrain this regard; parivindatipari + vid[] lbhe (6U);
coayati[] + cu chedane (10U); cuati[] + cu chedane (6P); dvayampair
of verbs; etatthis; nakha-katein the sense of wounding with the nails.

2.1.40
parivajata liyaty ligaty
upaghati kro-karoty tmane dvv
aka-playatti ca
parivajatepari + vanj[a] parivage (1A); liyati[] + li[a] ligane (4P);
ligati[] + lig[i] gatau (1P); upaghatiupa + guh[] savarae (1U) by 468;
kro-karotikroa + abhta-tad- bhve vi + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276,
1277, and 612; tmanein the tmanepada; dvau the two verbs; aka-playati
nma-dhtu of aka-pli + tat karoti []i; itithus; caand.
2.1.41
sapta syu parirambhe parirabhate py atha
rirasym kmayate rirasate tra vasyati
cet para-yoit
saptathe seven verbs; syuare; parirambhein the sense of embracing;
parirabhatepari + rabh[a] rbhasye (1A); apialso; athastart of a meaning;
rirasymin the sense of desiring to have sex; kmayate kam[u] kntau (1A) by
448; rirasatesan-anta of ram[u] krym (1A); atrain this regard; vasyati
nma-dhtu of va + [k]ya[n], by Bhat 866; cetif; para-yoit there is another
lady (apart from ones wife).
2.1.42
avasyati tu yady av cumbane
cumbatty ada vyavaiti saviaty atra
nidhuvaty api maithune
avasyatinma-dhtu of ava + [k]ya[n], by Bhat 866; tubut; yadiif; av
there is a mare; cumbanein the sense of kissing; cumbati cub[i] vaktra-sayoge
(1P); itithus; adathe verb; vyavaitivi + ava + i[] gatau (2P); saviatisam +
vi[a] praveane (6P); atrain this regard; nidhuvatini + dh vidhnane (6P) by 381;
apialso; maithunein the sense of mating.
2.1.43
mithun-bhavatty atra samprayukte
yabhaty api upabhukte tpabhoge

mithun-bhavatimithuna + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276,

1277, and 612; itithus; atrain this regard; samprayuktesam + pra + yuj[ir] yoge
(7U); yabhatiyabh[a] maithune (1P); apialso; upabhukteupa + bhuj[a]
planbhyavahrayo (7P); tuend of a meaning; upabhogein the sense of
enjoying; sambhuktesam + bhuj[a] planbhyavahrayo (7P); nirviatinir +
vi[a] praveane (6P); apialso.
2.1.44
prasyate praste ca garbha-moke
vijyate prajyate janayati prasautti

prasyatepra + [] pri-garbha-vimocane (4A); prastepra + [] pri-

garbha-vimocane (2A); caand; garbha-mokein the sense of delivering a child;
vijyatevi + jan[] prdur-bhve (4A); prajyatepra + jan[] prdur-bhve (4A);
janayaticausative of jan[] prdur-bhve (4A); prasautipra + u prasave (2P); iti
thus; athe six verbs; ritexplained.
2.1.45
garbha-mokdi-saklee dvaya
kuthnti kunthati layaty mayaty atra
rujaty api ruji trayam
garbha-mokdi-sakleein the sense of suffering in conditions like delivering a child;
dvayamthe two verbs; kuthntikunth[a] saklee (9P); kunthatikuth[i] his-
sakleayo (1P); layati causative of l[a] rujym (1P); mayatinma-dhtu of
ma + tat karoti []i; atrain this regard; rujatiruj[o] bhage (6P); apialso; rujiin
the sense of experiencing pain, illness; trayamthe three verbs.

2.1.46
ullghayati bhaiaje bhiajyati cikitsati
upabarhaty upadadhty tmane py
upabarhae
ullghayaticausative of ud + lgh[] smarthye (1A); bhaiajein the sense of healing;
bhiajyati bhiaj (kav-di); cikitsatisvrtha-san-anta of kit[a] nivse rogpanayane
saaye ca (1P) by 442; upabarhatiupa + bh[ir] vddhau abde ca (1P); upadadhti
upa + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;
upabarhaein the sense of resting on a cushion.
iti manuya-ce-
varga
itithus ends; manuya-ce-vargathe section on human
activities.

Dvitya
ka
Now the activities of humans in general and the specific activities of brhmaas and
so on will be summarized in sections. Other connected topics will also be described.
Sometimes, instead of the words n and so on, other synonyms (such as manuya
and so on) will be used.
Now we begin the section on human activities in
general.
2.1.2
rambhe
Prakramate, prastauti, prastute, rabhate, and upakramate mean
to begin.
2.1.3
Praktnustau
Anubadhnti and udghtayati mean to continue with what has already
been begun.
2.1.3
Kt
au
Karoti, kurute, vidhatte, vidadhti, tanute, vitanoti, sjati, updayati, nirmimte,
bhvayati, nirmti, racayati, nipdayati, nirvartayati, sdhayati, anutihati, and
carati mean to do, make.
2.1.5
raddh-yukte ktau
44
Sjyate means to make with faith and love.

2.1.6
Ceym
45
Uttihate , ghaate, ceate, vyyacchate, vypriyate, pravartate, and hate
mean to endeavor.
2.1.7
Vi-utsarge
Guvati and hadate mean to evacuate
[stool].
2.1.7
Mtrae
Avamehati, mtrayati, and prasravati mean to
urinate.
2.1.8
Udvartane
Unmri, utsdayati, and udvartayati means to to rub,
massage.
2.1.8
Taldibhir lepe
Mrakayati and abhyanakti mean to smear using the hands
and so on.
2.1.9
Paridhne
Paridadhti, savastrayati, cchdayati, vaste, and paridhatte mean
to wear.
2.1.10
Ka-bandhe
Ghaayati and parikaroti mean to tie on the waist (in regard to
a belt).
2.1.10
Prvtau
Pracchdayati and prvoti mean to cover (with an outer
garment).
2.1.11
Carcym
Anulimpati, anulimpate, upadegdhi, upadigdhe, and carcayati mean
to anoint.
2.1.11
Bhdi-
grahae
44
tmapada endings are applied after the dhtu sj[a] visarge (6P) whose peculiarity is raddh, and
the vikaraa []ya is also added: sje raddh-vata ya ca (Bhat 1154). An example is vaiavo
ml sjyate (The Vaiava faithfully makes a garland) (Bhat vtti 1154). Sjyate is also a form of
the dhtu sj[a] visarge (4A). In this context, only the sixth class dhtu sj is used.
45
Ud is applied after the dhtu h when there is no motion upwards: athodo nrdhva-ceane
(Bhat 1130). In the vtti,
Jva Gosvm adds: hari-sevym uttihate, tatrotsahate ity artha. anrdhva iti kim? sand
uttihati ka. ace-mtre pi nahari-bhakte sukham uttihati. Hari-sevym uttihate
means He is energetic in regard to serving Hari. Why do we use the word anrdhva? Consider
sand uttihati ka, Ka rises from the seat. The tmapada endings are also blocked when
there is no activity: hari-bhakte sukham uttihati (Happiness arises from devotional service related
Pratimucati, pratimucate, mucati, mucate, pinahyati, pinahyate, apinahyati, and
apinahyate

2.1.12
Bhym
Parikaroti, parikurute, alakaroti, alakurute, maati, maayati, bhayati,
bhati, and

2.1.13
Avatase
Uttasati and avatasati mean to adorn with a
garland.
Anakti, and kajjalayati mean to decorate with
cosmetics.
2.1.14
Vjane
Vjayati means to
fan.
46
Surabh-kurute, dhpayati , and vsayati mean to perfume,
make fragrant.
2.1.16
Dptau
Caksti, bhsate, bhti, rocate, prakate, obhate, bhrjate, rjati, rjate, dvyati,
dpyate, dyotate, jvalati, and ullasati mean to shine, look beautiful.

2.1.16
Naane
Nayati, naati, and ntyati mean to
dance, act.
2.1.17
Hve
Hilati means to express amorous
inclination.
2.1.18
Kranrthak
47
Kumrayati, khelati, viharati, viharate, krati, dvyati, khelyati, lalati , ramate,
vilasati, krate, anukrate, sakrate, and parikrate mean to play, jest,
48
amuse oneself.
2.1.19
Pluti-khelym
Krdate means to leap, jump (in the sense of
playing).
2.1.19
Anukarae
Viambayati, anukaroti, anukurute, anuharati, and anuharate mean
to imitate.

46
An alternate form is dhpyati, made with the dhtu dhp[a] santpe (1P), by the stra gup-
dhpa-vicchi-pai- panibhya ya (392).
47
Lalati is made with the dhtu la[a] vilse (1P). This is because la-rma and a-rma are
interchangable: a-layo ra- layo ca prya-ekatva-ravat (Bhat vtti 128).
48
The dhtu kr[] takes tmapada endings by two stras: 1. anv--paribhya kra ca (Bhat
1121); and 2. samo
kjana iyate (Bhat 1122). But if anu is a ka-pravacanya (672), parapada endings are applied.
Jva Gosvm gives the example kam anu krati (He plays with Ka) (Bhat vtti 1121).
Further, Jva Gosvm says: sakrate. kjane tu sakrati akaa, Parapada endings are applied if
the sense is a rattling of wheels or the uttering of any inarticulate sound. For example: sakrati
2.1.20
Sdye
Pratinidhatte and anukalpate mean to be
similar.
2.1.20
Skhalane
Rigati and skhalati mean to totter,
stumble.
2.1.21
Tare
Tyati, dhitsati, udanyati, and pipsati mean to
be thisty.
2.1.21
Pne
Pibati, cmati, dhayati, and pyate mean to
drink.
2.1.22
Kahina-dravya-sambaddha-
rasa-pne
Cati means to suck.
Bubhukate, kudhyati, jighatsati, and aanyati mean to
be hungry.
2.1.24
Bhuktau
Jamati, anti, carati, bhakayati, atti, khdati, bhukte, toti, taroti,
abhyavaharati, psti, jakiti, pratyavasyati, and upayukte mean to eat.

2.1.24
Danta-cchede
Carvati means to
chew.
2.1.25
Sa-hvanau bhuktau
Vivaati and avavaati mean to make sound while swallowing
or eating.
2.1.25
Nigre
Gilati, grasate, and nigirati mean to
swallow.
2.1.26
Garhite dae
Dandayate, dandati, dandati, and dandai mean to
49
bite badly.
2.1.26
Viuddhe dae
Daati and daayate mean to bite
properly.
2.1.27
Apasmre
Apasmarati means to forget, have
convulsions.
2.1.2
7
49
In this regard, the pratyaya ya[] is only applied after dan[a] when the sense is criticism of the
action: lupa-sada-cara- japa-jabha-daha-daa-gbhyo bhva-garhym eva ya (592). The
cakrapis are used in the sense of ya[].
Vireke
Viricyate in karma-kartari prayoga and atisarati in kartari prayoga mean to
be purged.
2.1.28
Vntau
Vamati, udgirati, chardayati, and udgilati mean to
vomit.
2.1.28
Tht-kre
Nihvyati and nihvati mean
to spit.
2.1.29
ee
Pariinai and eayati mean to
remain.
2.1.29
Tptau
Tpyati, tpnoti, and suhit-bhavati mean to satisfy, be
satisfied.
2.1.30
Virntau
Virmyati mean to rest. In this regard, the verb viramate is
sometimes seen.
ste, niviate, upaviati, and nidati mean
to sit.
2.1.31
rdhvatve
rdhv-bhavati, uttihati, and tihati mean to get
up, arise.
2.1.31
Krame
Anukrmati, paryeti, and paryate mean to follow in
sequence.
2.1.32
dne
Sv-karoti, sv-kurute, ghti, ghte, updatte, ghayate, lti, and pratcchati mean
to receive, take.
2.1.33
Tyge
Tyajati, utsjati, jahti, ujjhati, mucati, utsjyate, visjati, mucate, rahayati, pariharati,
pariharate, and

2.1.34
Varjane
Vrayati, nivrayati, vakti, vkte, vysedhati, niedhati, and varjayati mean to
avoid, exclude.
2.1.35
Varae
Varayati, vyvti, voti,vute, vti,vte, dhatte, nidhatte, nidadhti, and
dadhti mean to choose.

2.1.37
Arpae
ropayati, arpayati, and nyasyati mean to offer,
entrust.
2.1.37
Tad-bhede
Vinyasyati and sanniveayati mean to put down, deposit,
entrust.
2.1.38
Udvhe
50
Haste-karoti, haste-kurute, pau-karoti, pau-kurute, upayacchate , vivahati,
vivahate, udvahati, udvahate, pariayati, and pariayate mean to marry.

2.1.39
Jyehe nhe udvhe
Parivindati and parivindate mean to marry (when ones elder brother has not yet
married).
2.1.39
Nakha-kate
coayati and cuati mean to wound (with the
nails).
2.1.41
Parirambhe
Parivajate, liyati, ligati, upaghati, upaghate, kro-karoti, kro-kurute, aka-
playati, and

2.1.41
Rirasym
Kmayate and rirasate mean to desire to have
sex with.
2.1.41
Rirasy para-yoit cet
Vasyati means to desire to have sex (in regard to a woman other than a wife
51
desiring to have sex with a man).

2.1.42
Rirasy yady av
Avasyati means to desire to have sex (in regard to a mare desiring to have sex with
a stallion).
2.1.42
Cumbane
Cumbati means to
kiss.
2.1.42
Maithune
Vyavaiti, saviati, nidhuvati, mithun-bhavati, samprayukte, and yabhati mean to
mate, have intercourse.

2.1.4
3
50
tmapada endings are applied after upa + yam[u] uparame (1P) when the meaning is sv-kra (to
accept, make ones own): sv-kre tpayacchate (Bhat 1160). Jva Gosvm specifies: rukmim
upayacchate. sv-kara iti dra-karmay eveti kikdaya. sv-kra-mtra iti tu puruottama.
Kik, Klapa and others say that sv-kra, in this instance, only means to marry. But others like
Puruottama says it means accepting or appropriating in general. This is also the opinion of Jva
Gosvmi, and it is supported by the usage of poets like Bhai. In any case, to marry is still a
prominent meaning of upa + yam. The example rukmim upayacchate means He marries (or
accepts) Rukmi (Bhat vtti 1160). The stra iu-gami-yam cha ive (399) is also applied to
yam[u] uparame.
51
For example, Bhai writes lakmaa s vasyant (rpanakh desiring to unite with Lakmaa
Upabhoge
Upabhukte, sambhukte, and nirviati mean to
enjoy.
2.1.44
Garbha-moke
Prasyate, praste, vijyate, prajyate, janayati, and prasauti mean to
deliver a child.
2.1.45
Garbha-mokdi-saklee
Kuthnti and kunthati mean to suffer (during childbirth and
so on).
2.1.45
Ruji
layati, mayati, and rujati mean to
be ill.
2.1.46
Bhaiaje
Ullghayati, bhiajyati, and cikitsati mean to
cure.
2.1.46
Upabarhae
Upabarhati, upadadhti, and upadhatte mean to rest (on a cushion
and so on).
Here ends the section of human activities in
general.

Brahma-ce-
varga
2.2.1
auce nenekti nenikte praklayati
dhvati dhvate odhayati ca tad-
bhede mri mrjati
aucein the sense of cleanliness; nenektiij[ir] auce (3U); nenikteij[ir] auce
(3U); praklayatipra + kal[a] auce (10P); dhvatidhv[u] gati-uddhyo (1U);
dhvatedhv[u] gati-uddhyo (1U); odhayaticausative of udh[a] auce (4P); ca
and; tat-bhedein the sense of a certain kind of cleanliness; mrimj[]
uddhau (2P) by 502; mrjatimj[] auce (10P, yuj- di).

2.2.2
atropasaskarotti catasro
mrjayaty api

atrain this regard; upasaskarotiupa + sam + [u]k[] karae (8U) by 558; iti
thus; catasra four; mrjayatimj[] auce (10P); apialso; pvitryein the sense
of purity; tuend of a meaning; puntip[] pavane (9U); itithus; puntep[]
pavane (9U); pavatep[] pavane (1A); apialso; caand.

2.2.3
udhyatti uc-bhve viudhyaty
avadti
snne tu snyati snti tad-viee
udhyatiudh[a] auce (4P); itithus; uc-bhvein the sense of being pure;
viudhyativi + udh[a] auce (4P); avadtiava + d[] dne (1P); snnein
the sense of a bath; tuend of a
meaning; snyatiai veane (1P); snti auce (2P); tat-vieein the
sense of a special kind of bathing; tuend of a meaning; majjati[u]masj[o]
uddhau (6P).
2.2.4
vruaty plavate ctra syu catasro
vaghate upaspati ccmaty ubhe

vruativru[a] majjane (6P); plavate[] + plu[] gatau (1A); caand; atrain

this regard; syuare; catasrafour; avaghateava + gh[] viloane (1A);
upaspatiupa + sp[a] saspare (6P); caand; cmati[] + cam[u] adane
(1P), trivikrama by 396; ubhethe two verbs; camana-arthakein the sense of
sipping water from the palm of the hand for purification.
2.2.5
abhimukhygame bhyeti tathbhyyti ca
dvayam abhyutthna-kriyy tu syd
abhyuttihatty ada prghuaty atith-
bhve tathbhygacchatty api
abhimukhya-gamein the sense of coming directly in front; abhyetiabhi + i[] gatau
(2P); tath and; abhyytiabhi + [] + y prpane (2P); caand; dvayamthe two
verbs; abhyutthna- kriyymin the sense of rising (froms ones seat to show honor);
tuend of a meaning; sytis; abhyuttihatiabhi + ud + h gati-nivttau (1P); iti
thus; adathe verb; prghuatipra + []
+ ghu[a] bhramae (6P); atith-bhvein the sense of being a guest; tathin that
way;
2.2.6
abhivdayati praatv upasaghti ctmane
dvitayam namati namasyati a syu praipatati

abhivdayatiabhi + vad[a] sandea-vacane (10P); praatauin the sense of

bowing; upasaghtiupa + sam + grah[a] updne (9U); caand; tmanein
the tmanepada; dvitayamthe two verbs; namatiam[a] prahvatve abde ca
(1P); namasyatinma-dhtu of namas + [k]ya[], by 614; athe six verbs; syu
are; praipatatipra + ni + pat[] gatau (1P); vandatevad[i] abhivdana-stutyo
(1A); caand; atrain this regard.
2.2.7
athrcaty acati bhajaty apacyati
ctmane
athastart of a meaning; arcatiarc[a] pjym (1P); acatiac[u] gati-pjanayo
(1P); bhajati bhaj[a] sevym (1U); apacyatiapa + cy[] pj-nimanayo
(1U); caand; tmanein the tmanepada.

2.2.8
catasra pjayaty atra mahayaty
arhayaty api sabhjayaty arcayate

catasrafour; pjayatipj[a] pjym (10P); atrain this regard; mahayati

maha pjym (10P); arhayatiarh[a] pjym (10P); apialso; sabhjayati
sabhja prti-sevanayo (10P); arcayatearc[a] pjym (10A); mahatimah[a]
pjym (1P); rdhayaticausative of [] + rdh[a] sasiddhau (4P, and 5P); api
also.
2.2.9
saparyayati crdhnoty rdhyati
tathrhati mnayaty api pjym
dare sat-karoti ca
saparyayatisapara (kav-di); caand; rdhnoti[] + rdh[a] samsiddhau (5P);
rdhyati [] + rdh[a] sasiddhau (4P); tathin that way; arhatiarh[a] pjym
(1P); mnayatimn[a] pjym (10P); apialso; pjymin the sense of worshiping;
darein the sense of respecting;
52
sat-karotisat + [u]k[] karae (8U) ; caand.

2.2.10
sammanyate cdriyate tath sambhvayaty api
nrjane tu nirmacaty atra nrjayaty api
sammanyatesam + man[a] jne (4A); caand; driyate[] + d[] dare (6A) by
426 and 381; tathand; sambhvayatisam + bh avakalpane (10P); apialso;
nrjanein the sense of worshipubg the deity with a lamp ; tuend of a meaning;
nirmacatinir + mac[i] dhraocchrya- pjaneu (1A); atrain this regard; nrjayati
causative of nir + rj[] dptau (1U); apialso.
2.2.11
urate paricaraty upste
varivasyati catasra paricaryy
layaty upasevane
uratesan-anta of ru ravae (1P) by 580; paricaratipari + car[a] gatau (1P);
upsteupa + s[a] upaveane vidyamnaty ca (2A); varivasyatinma-dhtu of
varivas + [k]ya[], by 614; catasrafour; paricaryymin the sense of serving,
worshiping; llayatila[a] upasevym (gauravdi-rahitena prti-yogena sev
upasev, service endowed with love and devoid of awe and reverence is called
upasev) (10P); upasevanein the sense of intimate service.
2.2.12
tathopasevate ctha yajate
copatihate yajaty api surrcym

tathin that way; upasevateupa + ev[] sevane (1A); caand; athastart of a

meaning; yajate yaj[a] deva-pj-sagati-karaa-dneu (1U); caand; upatihate
upa + h gati-nivttau (1P); yajatiyaj[a] deva-pj-sagati-karaa-dneu (1U); api
also; sura-arcymin the sense of worshiping the demigods; athastart of a
meaning; viramayaticausative of vi + ram[u] tapasi khede ca (4P); apialso.

2.2.13
savhayati ctra dve pddy-
agopamardane dne dadti datte ca
dadate vitaraty api
savhayaticausative of sam + vah[a] prpae (1U); caand; atrain this regard;
dvethe two verbs; pda-dy-aga-upamardanein the sense of massaging the feet
and other bodily parts; dne in the sense of giving; dadti[u]dh[] dhraa-
poaayo (3U); datte[u]dh[] dhraa- poaayo (3U); caand; dadatedad[a]
dne (1A); vitarativi + t plavana-taraayo (1P); api also.

2.2.14
prayacchaty arpayati ca diate
diati kvacit apavarjayati sparayati
virayaty api
prayacchatipra + d[] dne (1P) by vtti 421; arpayaticausative of gatau
prpae ca (1P) or gatau (3P), by 571; caand; diatedi[a] atisarjane (6U); diati
di[a] atisarjane (6U); kvacit sometimes; apavarjayatiapa + vj[] varjane (10P,
yuj-di); sparayatecausative of sp[a] saspare (6P); virayativi + ra[a]
dne (10P); apialso.

52
The word sat is an ury-di
(vtti 777).
2.2.15
tath vilabhate rti pratipdayatty api
svadh-karoty tmane dvau pitbhyo
nirvapaty api
tathin that way; vilabhatevi + [u]labh[a] prptau (1A); rtir dne (2P);
pratipdayati causative of prati + pad[a] gatau (4A); itithus; apialso; svadh-karoti
svadh + [u]k[] karae (8U); tmanein the tmanepada; dvauthe two verbs;
pitbhyato the forefathers; nirvapatinir
+ [u]vap[a] bja-tantu-santne (1U, yaj-di); apialso.
2.2.16
juhoti havim agnau prakepe
tritaya matam svh-vaua-
vaabhya ca karoti kurute pi ca
juhotihu vahnau dne (3P); havimof the sacrificial offerings; agnauinto the fire;
prakepein the sense of throwing; tritayamthe three verbs; matamconsidered;
svh-vaua-vaabhya after the words svh, vaua, and vaa; caand; karoti
[u]k[] karae (8U); kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); apialso; caand.

2.2.17
prakepe tu praivapaty atra
prakipyatty api minoty tmane pi

prakepe in the sense of casting, throwing; tuend of a meaning; praivapatipra

+ ni + [u]vap[a] bja-tantu-santne (1U); atrain this regard; prakipyatipra +
kip[a] prerae (4P); iti thus; apialso; minoti[u]mi[] prakepae (5U); tmane
in the tmanepada; apialso; syu are; catasrafour; prakipatipra + kip[a]
prerae (6U); apialso.
2.2.18
vikipaty tmane pi syd vikepe
vikiraty api
mantrae ketayati nimantrayata ity
vikipativi + kip[a] prerae (6U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; sytis;
vikepein the sense of throwing, scattering; vikirativi + k vikepe (6P); apialso;
mantraein the sense of inviting; ketayaticausative of kit[a] nivse rogpanayane
saaye ca (1P) (Commentary 446); nimantrayateni + matr[i] gupta-bhae (10A);
itithus; apialso.
2.2.19
atrmantrayate ctha tarpae
dhinute vati dhinoti prayati ca
paca tarpayatty api
atrain this regard; mantrayate[] + matr[i] gupta-bhae (10A); caand; atha
start of a meaning; tarpaein the sense of satisfying; dhinutedhiv[i] prane (5P),
by Bhat 738; avati av[a] plane (1P); dhinotidhiv[i] prane (5P), by Bhat 738;
prayaticausative of pr[] tarpae icchy ca (9U) by 573; caand; pacathe
five verbs; tarpayatitp[a] prane (10P); itithus; apialso.

2.2.20
anujys tu karae nujnty
anumanyate dhpayaty tmane pi dvau
dhpane pyayaty am
anujyof the permission; tubut; karaein the sense of doing; anujntianu +
j avabodhane (9P); anumanyateanu + man[a] jne (4A); dhpayaticausative of
dhe[] pne (1P) by 412 and 571; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; dvauthe
two verbs; dhpanein the sense of causing to drink; pyayaticausative of p pane
(1P) by 572; amthe two verbs.
2.2.21
cayaty-dayo py atra syur atho
pariveae
dvaya ymayatty atra parivevei

cayati causative of c[a] pne (1P); dayaand so on; apialso; atrain

this regard; syu are; athostart of a meaning; pariveaein the sense of a
distributing food; dvayamthe two verbs; ymayatiyam[a] pariveae (10P); iti
thus; atrain this regard; pariveveipari + vi[] vyptau (3U); caand;
tmanein the tmanepada.
2.2.22
dayaty tmane py atra bhojayaty-di
bhojane
piparti prayati ca prayaty api prae
dayaticausative of ad[a] bhakae (2P); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;
atrain this regard; bhojayaticausative of bhuj[a] planbhyavahrayo (7P); di
and so on; bhojanein the sense of causing to eat; pipartip plana-praayo
(3P) by 521, or p plana-praayo (3P) by 521; prayatipr[] pyyne (10P);
caand; prayaticausative of p plana-praayo (3P or 9P); apialso; prae
in the sense of filling.
2.2.23
atrpyyayati prti ptty atha
toae sukh-karoti sukhayaty
hldayati cety api
atrain this regard; pyyayaticausative of [] + pyai[] vddhau (1A); prtipr
prae (2P); ptip plana-praayo (9P, pv-di); itithus; athastart of a
meaning; toaein the sense of satisfying, delighting; sukh-karotisukha + [c] +
[u]k[] karae (8U), by Bhat 3169; sukhayaticausative of sukha tat-kriyym (10P);
hldayaticausative of [] + hld[] avyakte abde sukhe ca (1A); caand; itithus;
apialso.
2.2.24
dhinoty nandayati ca mayaty-
dayas tath
ijyrambhe dkate ca japatti
dhinotidhiv[i] prane (5P) by Bhat 738; nandayaticausative of [] + [u]nad[i]
samddhau (1P); caand; mayaticausative of m[a] sukhane (6P, and 9P);
dayaand so on; tathin that way; ijy-rambhein the sense of the beginning of
worship; dkatedk[a] mauyejyopanayana-niyama-vratdeeu (1A); caand;
japatijap[a] vyakty vci mnase ca (1P); itithus; tridhthreefold; japein
the sense of chanting, repeating mentally.
2.2.25
jajapyate jape nindye sajapaty atra
obhane upkaroty tmane pi
saskrdye ruter grahe
jajapyateya-anta of jap[a] vyakty vci mnase ca (1P) by 592; japein the sense
of chanting; nindyewhich is reproachable; sajapatisam + jap[a] vyakty vci
mnase ca (1P); atrain this regard; obhanewhich is nice; upkarotiupa + [] +
[u]k[] karae (8U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; saskra-dyeduring
sacred ceremonies and so on; ruteof the Vedas; grahein the sense of reciting.

2.2.26
abhuktau tpavasati laghate vratayaty
api tapyate tu tapasyy tapasyaty
apy ubhe kriye
abhuktauin the sense of not eating; tuend of a meaning; upavasatiupa +
vas[a] nivse (1P); laghatelagh[i] gatau (1A); vratayatinma-dhtu of vrata +
[]i, by Bhat 895; apialso; tapyate tap[a] dhe aivarye v (4A); tuend of a
meaning; tapasyymin the sense of austerities; tapasyatinma-dhtu of tapas
+ [k]ya[], by 614; apialso; ubhethe two verbs; kriyetwo verbs.

2.2.27
karoti kurute mauye bhadra-madra-
purasare muayaty atra vapati tath
muayate pi ca
karoti[u]k[] karae (8U); kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); mauyein the sense of
shaving; bhadra-madra-purasarepreceded by the words bhadra and madra (see
Bhat 3173); muayati causative of mu[i] khaane (1P) or nma-dhtu of mua
+ tat karoti []i, by 617; atrain that regard; vapati[u]vap[a] bja-tantu-santne
(1U); tathand; muayatecausative of mu[i] khaane (1P); apialso; caand.

2.2.28
upekate tathodste pade mdhya-
sthya-vcin
syur virajyaty uparamaty tmane
upekateupa + k[a] darane (1A); tathin that way; udsteud + s[a]
upaveane vidyamnaty ca (2A); padethe two verbs; mdhya-sthyaneutrality;
vcinwhich express; syuare; virajyativi + ranj[a] rge (4U); uparamatiupa +
ram[u] krym (1A); tmanein the tmanepada; virajativi + ranj[a] rge (1U);
amthe three verbs.
2.2.29
upamyati vairgye tath nirvidyate
pi ca mumukate mumukym
amtyati mokate
upamyatiupa + am[u] upaame (4P); vairgyein the sense of being detached;
tathin that way; nirvidyatenir + vid[a] sattym (4A); apialso; caand;
mumukatesan-anta of muc[] mokae (6U) by 584; mumukymin the sense
of desiring liberation; amtyatinma-dhtu of amta + [k]ya[n]; mokatesan-
anta of muc[] mokae (6U) by 584.
2.2.30
pratyacati samdhatte nirvikalp-bhavaty
api parivrajati sannyse sannyasyaty
tmane py ada
pratyacatiprati + ac[u] gati-pjanayo (1P); samdhattesam + [] + [u]dh[]
dhraa- poaayo (3U); nirvikalp-bhavatinirvikalpa + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh
sattym (1P), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; apialso; parivrajatipari + vraj[a]
gatau (1P); sannysein regards to the sannysa rama; sannyasyati sam + ni +
as[u] kepae (4P); tmanein the tmanepada; api also; adathe verb.

2.2.31
brahm-bhavati kaivalye nirvtti
catuayam karma-kartari tatra
mucyate cpavjyate
brahm-bhavatibrahman + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276;
kaivalyein the sense of oneness; nirvtinir + v gati-gandhanayo (2P); itithus;
catuayamthe four verbs; karma-kartari karma-kartari prayoga (639); tatrain that
regard; mucyate muc[] mokae (6U); caand; apavjyateapa + vj[] varjane
(2A).
iti brahma-ce-
varga
itithus ends; brahma-ce-vargathe section on the specific activities of
brhmaas.

Now we begin the section on the specific activities of

brhmaas.
2.2.1
auce
Nenekti, nenikte, praklayati, dhvati, dhvate, and odhayati mean
to cleanse.
2.2.1
Tad-bhede
Mri, mrjati, upasaskaroti, and mrjayati mean to clean (in a
certain way).
2.2.2
Pvitrye
Punti, punte, and pavate mean to
purify.
2.2.3
uc-bhve
udhyati, viudhyati, and avadti mean to be
purified.
2.2.3
Snne
Snyati and snti mean to
bathe.
2.2.3
Tad-viee
Majjati, vruati, plavate, and avaghate mean to bathe in a certain way, i.e to dive,
swim, and so on.
2.2.4
camanrthake
Upaspati and cmati mean to perform
camana.
2.2.5
Abhimukhygame
Abhyeti and abhyyti mean to come directly in
front.
2.2.5
Abhyutthna-kriyym
Abhyuttihati means to rise (from a seat and so on to
show honor).
2.2.5
Atith-bhve
Prghuati and abhygacchati mean to come as a
guest.
2.2.6
Praatau
Abhivdayati, abhivdayate, upasaghti, upasaghte, namati, namasyati,
praipatati, and

2.2.9
Pjy
m
Arcati, acati, bhajati, bhajate, apacyati, apacyate, pjayati, pjayate, mahayati,
mahayate, arhayati, sabhjayati, arcayate, mahati, rdhayati, saparyayati, rdhnoti,
rdhyati, arhati, and mnayati mean to honor, worship.

2.2.9
dare
Sat-karoti, sammanyate, driyate, and sambhvayati mean to greet, show
great respect.
2.2.10
Nrjane
Nirmacati and nrjayati mean to worship the deity with
a lamp.
2.2.11
Paricaryym
urate, paricarati, upste, and varivasyati mean to
serve, worship.
2.2.11
Upasevane
Layati and upasevate mean to serve
intimately.
2.2.12
Surrcym
53
Yajati, yajate, and upatihate mean to worship the
demigods.
2.2.13
Pddy-agopamardane
Viramayati and savhayati mean to
rest.
2.2.13
Dne
Dadti, datte, dadate, vitarati, prayacchati, arpayati, diate, diati mean to give.
In this context,
apavarjayati, sparayati, virayati, vilabhate, rti, and pratipdayati are also
2.2.15
Pitbhyo dne
Svadh-karoti, svadh-kurute, and nirvapati mean to offer to the deceased
forefathers.
2.2.16
Havim agnau prakepe
Juhoti, svh-karoti, svh-kurute, vaua-karoti, vauat-kurute, vaa-karoti, and
vaa-kurute mean to offer an oblation into the fire.

2.2.17
Prakepe
Praivapati, prakipyati, minoti, minute, and prakipati mean
to throw.
2.2.18
Vikepe
Vikipati, vikipate, and vikirati mean to
scatter.
2.2.1
8
53
tmapada endings are applied after upa + h by the stra devrc-sagati-kti-maitru
pathi kartari, mantrasya karaatve ckarmatve copa-prvakt (Bhat 1131). Jva Gosvm gives
the examples bhakto harim upatihate, and vaiava upatihate mantrea kam.
mantrae
Ketayati, nimantrayate, and mantrayate mean to
54
invite.
2.2.19
Tarpae
Dhinute, avati, dhinoti, prayati, and tarpayati mean to
please, satisfy.
2.2.20
Anujy karae
Anujnti and anumanyate mean to
permit.
2.2.20
Dhpane
Dhpayati, dhpayate, pyayati, pyayate, cayati, and so on mean to offer
a beverage.
2.2.21
Pariveae
Ymayati, parivevei, and parivevie mean to
distribute food.
2.2.22
Bhojane
dayati, dayate, bhojayati, bhojayate, and so on mean
to feed.
2.2.22
Prae
Piparti, prayati, prayati, pyyayati, prti, and pti
mean to fill.
2.2.23
Toae
Sukh-karoti, sukhayati, hldayati, dhinoti, nandayati, mayati, and so on mean to
make happy.
2.2.24
Ijyrambhe
Dkate means to undergo the qualification to
worship.
2.2.24
Jape
Japati means to
chant.
2.2.25
Nindye jape
Jajapyate means to chant
badly.
2.2.25
obhate jape
Sajapati means to chant
nicely.
2.2.25
Saskrdye ruter grahe
Upkaroti and upkurute mean to recite the Vedas during saskras and
55
so on.
54
Jva Gosvm explains the difference between nimantraa and mantraa. Nimantraa means
niyoga-karaa (doing out of obligation). For example, iha bhujth vaiava (I invite you to dine
here, O Vaiava). mantraa means kma-cra-karaa (Doing according to ones own will). For
example, ihsth (You may sit here, if you like) (vtti 714).
2.2.26
Abhuktau
Upavasati, laghate, and vratayati mean
to fast.
2.2.26
Tapasyym
Tapyate and tapasyati mean to perform
austerities.
2.2.27
Mauye
Bhadr-karoti, bhadr-kurute, madr-karoti, madr-kurute, muayati, vapati, and
muayate mean to shave.

2.2.28
Mdhya-sthya-vcin
Upekate and udste mean to be neutral,
indifferent.
2.2.29
Vairgye
56
Virajyati, uparamati , uparamate, virajati, upamyati, and nirvidyate mean to
be detached, dispassionate, uninterested.

2.2.29
Mumukym
Mumukate, amtyati, and mokate mean to desire to become
liberated.
Pratyacati, samdhatte, and nirvikalp-bhavati mean to be fixed in
meditation.
2.2.30
Sannyse
Parivrajati, sannyasyati, and sannyasyate mean to renounce the world, wander
around as a
sannys.
2.2.31
Kaivalye
Brahm-bhavati, nirvti, as well as mucyate and apavjyate used in karma-kartari
prayoga mean to be merged in Brahman.

Here ends the section on the specific activities of

brhmaas.

Katriya-ce-
varga
2.3.1
aivarya indate ca tapyate
dha ity api
55
According to Apte as well as Monier-Williams dictionaries, in this context the recitation of the Vedas
is performed at the end of the saskra ceremony.
56
Parapada endings are applied after the dhtu ram[u] krym (1A) by these two stras: 1. vy--
paribhyo rama,
tmapada endings are forbidden after vi + ram, [] + ram and pari + ram (except of course if it is
bhva or karma vcyas); and 2. upt, The above also happens with upa + ram (Bhat 1178-1179).
Upa + ram has an innate causative sense when it is sa-karmaka: viudattam uparamati,
uparamayatty artha, (He causes Viudatta to refrain) (Bhat vtti 1179). But upa + ram only
optionally takes parapada endings if it is akarmaka: vibh ced akarmaka (Bhat 1180). In the
vtti, Jva Gosvm adds: uparamati, uparamate. nivartate ity artha (uparamati and uparamate
pratihptau tu vikhyti prakhyti ca
pratihati
aivaryein the sense of being able, powerful, in control; indatiid[i] paramaivarye
(1P); e[a] aivarye (2P); caand; tapyatetap[a] dhe aivarye v (4A);
adheadhi + [a] aivarye (2P); itithus; apialso; pratih-ptauin the sense
of attaing wide renown; tuend of a meaning; vikhytivi + khy prakathane (2P);
prakhytipra + khy prakathane (2P); caand; pratihati pra + h gati-nivttau
(1P).
2.3.2
rakae tryate pti gopyati
bhunakti ca piparti rakati tath
playaty avatti ca
rakaein the sense of protecting; tryatetrai[] plane (1A); pti p rakae (2P);
gopyati nma-dhtu of gup[] + ya by 392; bhunaktibhuj[a]
planbhyavahrayo (7P); caand; pipartip plana-praayo (3P) by 521, or p
plana-praayo (3P) by 521; rakatirak[a] plane (1P); tathand; playati
pl[a] rakae (10P); avatiav[a] plane (1P); itithus; caand.
2.3.3
sti iau ikayati dae
daayatty ada dmyaty atha va-
kre dhrayaty tmane pi ca
stis[u] anuiau (2P); iauin the sense of instructing, commanding;
ikayaticausative of ik[a] vidyopdne (1A); daein the sense of punishing;
daayatidaa daa-nipte (10P); itithus; adathe verb; dmyatidam[u]
upaame (4P); athastart of a new meaning; va-kre in the sense of bringing
under control; dhrayaticausative of dh[] avasthne (6A); tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; caand.
2.3.4
tath va-karotti saghtti ca
prva-vat prapadyate tu
aragatau araayaty api
tathin that way; va-karotivaa + abhta-tad-bhve vi + [u]k[] karae (8U),
by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; itithus; saghtisam + grah[a] updne (9U); iti
thus; caand; prva-vatas before; prapadyatepra + pad[a] gatau (4A); tuend of
a meaning; araa-gatauin the sense of surrendering; araayatinma-dhtu of
araa + tat karoti []i; apialso.
2.3.5
parikrta ity etad utkocdi-va-
ktau yattau syd yatate va-
bhavati ca dvayam
parikrtepari + [u]kr[] dravya-vinimaye (9U); itithus; etatthe verb; utkoca-
diwith bribery and so on; va-ktauin the sense of bringing under control;
yattauin the sense of being subject to; sytis; yatate[] + yat[] prayatne
(1A); va-bhavativaa + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276,
1277, and 612; caand; dvayamthe two verbs.
2.3.6
sthir-ktau sthpayati tath
drahayatty api
dhrarthe dhrayati dadhti ca
sthir-ktauin the sense of making firm; sthpayaticausative of h gati-nivttau
(1P) by 571; tathin that way; drahayatinma-dhtu of dha + tat karoti []i, by
617; itithus; apialso; dhra-arthewhen the sense is holding, bearing; dhrayati
causative of dh[] dhrae (1U); dadhti[u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); ca
and; bibharti[u]bh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); caand.
2.3.7
dva tmane ca dadhate dharatti ca
pacakam niyukta jpayati nidiaty

dvethe two verbs; tmanein the tmanepada; caand; dadhatedadh[a] dhrae

(1A); dharatidh[] dhrae (1U); itithus; caand; pacakamthe five verbs;
niyukteni + yuj[ir] yoge (7U); jpayaticausative of [] + j by 571; nidiatini
+ di[a] atisarjane (6U); diati [] + di[a] atisarjane (6U); apialso.

2.3.8
dvv tmane cjym atha
prasthpayaty api
preae preayati ca preyati
dvauthe two verbs; tmane in the tmanepada; caand; jymin the sense of
ordering; athastart of a meaning; prasthpayatipra + causative of h gati-
nivttau (1P) by 571; apialso; preaein the sense of sending, dispatching;
57
preayaticausative of pra + i[a] gatau (4P) ; ca and; preyatipra + i[a] gatau
(4P); prahiotipra + hi gatau vddhau ca (5P); caand.
2.3.9
sandee vcikayate sandiaty tmane
pi ca likhaty akara-vinyse tath
lipayati dvayam
sandeein the sense of sending a message; vcikayatenma-dhtu of vcika +
[k]ya[]; sandiatisam + di[a] atisarjane (6U); tmanein the tmanepada; api
also; caand; likhati likh[a] vilekhane (6P); akara-vinysein the sense of putting
down letters; tathin that way; lipayatinma-dhtu of lipi + tat karoti []i;
dvayamthe two verbs.
2.3.10
udbhlayata uddea-ktv
uddeayaty api
prerae prerayaty atra kipatty
udbhlayateud + bhal[a] nirpae (10A); uddea-ktauin the sense of making a
mention; uddeayaticausative of ud + di[a] atisarjane (6U); apialso; preraein
the sense of impelling; prerayatipra + r[a] prerae (10P); atrain this regard;
kipatikip[a] prerae (6U); itithus; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; ca
and.
2.3.11
klayaty asyati tath nudatti ca
pacakam sevate nusaraty atra

klayatikal[a] kepe (10P); asyatias[u] kepae (4P); tathin that way; nudati
ud[a] prerane (6U); itithus; caand; pacakamthe five verbs; sevateev[]
sevane (1A); anusaratianu + s gatau (1P); atrain this regard; bhajatibhaj[a]
sevym (1U); rayatiri[] sevym (1U); iti thus; caand.

2.3.12
tmane nuruaddhti tisra
evnuvartate anujvati sevy
juate nucaraty api

57
The form preayati is achieved by the stra upendr-dvaya-hara e-o-rmayor i-edhau vin, The a
or of an upendra is deleted when the e or o of any dhtu except i[] or edh[a] follows (Bhat 487).
tmanein the tmanepada; anuruaddhianu + rudh[ir] varae (7U); itithus;
tisrathree; evaonly; anuvartateanu + vt[u] vartane (1A); anujvatianu +
jv[a] pra-dhrae (1P); sevymin the sense of serving; juateju[] prti-
sevanayo (6A); anucaratianu + car[a] gatau (1P); apialso.

2.3.13
vta iti sambhaktau vanatty
tmane pi ca saj-karoty tmane pi

vtev[] sambhaktau (9A); itithus; sambhaktauin the sense of favoring,

serving; vanati van[a] abde sambhaktau ca (1P); itithus; tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; caand; saj- karotisaju + [u]k[] karae (8U); tmane
in the tmanepada; apialso; shyein the sense of giving assistance; satr-karoti
satr + [u]k[] karae (8U); caand.
2.3.14
prpae lambhayaty atra haraty api
nayaty api vahatty tmane py et
prpayaty payaty api
prpaein the sense of bearing, leading, carrying; lambhayaticausative of
[u]labh[a] prptau (1A) (n[um] by 457); atraand; haratih[] harae (haraa
dentara-prpaam, haraa means dentara-prpaam (taking to another place))
(1U); apialso; nayati[] prpae (1U); api also; vahativah[a] prpae (1U); iti
thus; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; etthese verbs; prpayatipra + p[]
lambhane (10P, yuj-di); payatip[] lambhane (10P, yuj-di); api also.

2.3.15
ye y-ant gamanrths te dhtavo n-
samrthak vilambate kuhati ca
vykipaty tmane pi ca
yewhich; y-antwhich end in []i; gamana-arthconvey the sense of motion; te
those; dhtavadhtus; n-sama-arthakhave the same meaning as []
prpae (1U); vilambatevi
+ lab[i] avasrasane (1A); kuhatikuh[i] gati-pratighte (1P); caand; vykipati
vi + [] + kip[a] prerae (6U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; caand.
2.3.16
mandyate cirayati vilambe tha
pratkate anuplayatty atra
pratiplayatti ca
mandyatenma-dhtu of manda +[k]ya[], by Bhat 878; cirayatinma-dhtu of
ciram + tat karoti []i; vilambein the sense of being late, slow; athastart of a
meaning; pratkateprati + k[a] darane (1A); anuplayatianu + pl[a] rakae
(10P), or causative of anu + p rakae (2P) by 573; itithus; atraand; pratiplayati
prati + pl[a] rakae (10P), or causative of prati + p rakae (2P) by 573; iti
thus; caand.
2.3.17
pratihrayati dvra-praveana-vidhau
kriy sambhrmyati tvary syt tvarate
sambhramaty api
pratihrayaticausative of prati + h[] harae (1U); dvra-praveana-vidhauin the
sense of the regulations in regards to going through entrances; kriythe verb;
sambhrmyatisam + bhram[u] anavasthne (4P), by 541; tvarymin the sense of
haste; sytis; tvarate[i]tvar[] sambhrame (1A); sambhramatisam + bhram[u]
calane (1P); apialso.
2.3.1
8
asym vijate ctha vaiklavye
viklavaty api vihvalaty atra alati

asymof these (previous verbs); vijate[] + [o]vij[] bhaya-calanayo (6A); ca

and; atha start of a meaning; vaiklavyein the sense of being confused, agitated;
58
viklavativi + klu[] gatau (1A) ; apialso; vihvalativi + hval[a] calane (1P); atra
and; alatial[a] vaiklavye (1P);
klaibyein the sense of being impotent; tuend of a meaning; klbateklb[]
adhrye (1A), or
2.3.19
klbyate tha kauilye vakate
kuatty api bhujati nyubjati tath

klbyatenma-dhtu of klba + [k]ya[]; athastart of a meaning; kauilyein

the sense of crookedness; vakatevak[i] kauilye (1A); kuatiku[a] kauilye
(6P); itithus; apialso; bhujatibhuj[o] kauilye (6P); nyubjatini + ubj[a] rjave
(6P); tathand; kucatikuc[a] kauilylp-bhvayo (1P); apialso; sama-
arthakamthe one with the same meaning (kruc[a] kauilylp-bhvayo (1P)).

2.3.20
gupta-vde mantrayate bhede
tpajapaty ada
dambhecchy dhpsatti
gupta-vdein the sense of a confidential utterance; mantrayatematr[i] gupta-
bhae (10A); bhedein the sense of a particular kind; tuend of a meaning;
upajapatiupa + jap[a] vyakty vci mnase ca (1P); adathe verb; dambha-
icchymin the sense of a desire to deceive; dhpsatisan-anta of danbh[u] dambhe
(5P), by 584; itithus; didambhiaticausative desiderative of danbh[u] dambhe (5P);
dhipsatisan-anta of danbh[u] dambhe (5P), by 584.
2.3.21
savarmayati sannahyaty atra
sannahyate pi ca sajjayaty api sannhe
tath daayate py ada
savarmayatisam + nma-dhtu of varman + []i, by Bhat 898; sannahyatisam +
ah[a] bandhane (4U); atrain this regard; sannahyate sam + ah[a] bandhane
(4U); apialso; caand; sajjayati causative of anj[a] sage (1P); apialso; sannhe
in the sense of equipping armor; taththen; daayatecausative of dan[a]
daane (1P); apiand; adathe verb.
2.3.22
adhiete dhiayane dhysane tv
adhitihati adhyste thdhivasatty
adhivse sa-karmak
adhieteadhi + [] svapne (2A); adhiayanein the sense of resting upon;
adhysanein the sense of sitting upon, presiding over; tuend of a meaning;
adhitihatiadhi + h gati-nivttau (1P); adhysteadhi + s[a] upaveane
vidyamnaty ca (2A); athastart of a meaning; adhivasatiadhi + vas[a] nivse
(1P); itithus; adhivsein the sense of residing in; sa-karmak are sa-karmaka.

2.3.23
a am syur athrohe rohaty
adhirohati sphurati spandane spande
calane tu catuayam

58
The dhtu klu[] gatau (1A) can be found in Mdhavy
dhtu-vtti.
asix verbs; amthose; syuare; athastart of a meaning; rohein the
sense of going up; rohati[] + ruh[a] janmani prdur-bhve ca (1P); adhirohati
adhi + ruh[a] janmani prdur- bhve ca (1P); sphuratisphur[a] sphurae (6P);
spandatespad[i] kicic-calane (1A); spandein the sense of quivering; calanein
the sense of shaking; tuend of a meaning; catuayamthe four verbs.

2.3.24
calati prekhati tath ghaate vellatty api
utsedhati tathonnahyaty ucchrayaty tmane
dvayam
calatical[a] kampane (1P); prekhatipra + ikh[i] gatau (1P); tathand; ghaate
gha[a] calane (1A); vellativell[a] gatau (1P); itithus; apialso; utsedhatiud +
idh[u] gatym (1P); tath and; unnahyatiud + ah[a] bandhane (4U); ucchrayati
ud + ri[] sevym (1U); tmanein the tmanepada; dvayamthe two verbs.

2.3.25
kobhate kubhyati kobhe gamane cati
gacchati pratihate jihte ca sarati
vrajatyate
kobhatekubh[a] sacalane (1A); kubhyatikubh[a] sacalane (4P); kobhein
the sense of being agitated; gamanein the sense of going, moving; acatiac[u]
gatau (1U); gacchatigam[] gatau (1P); pratihatepra + h gati-nivttau (1P);
jihte[o]h[] gatau (3A) by 523, 535; ca and; saratis gatau (1P); vrajativraj[a]
gatau (1P); yate[] gatau (4A).
2.3.26
padyate yti carati sarpaty ayati
cacati cchati sravati gte calaty

padyatepad[a] gatau (4A); ytiy prpane (2P); caraticar[a] gatau (1P); sarpati
sp[] gatau (1P); ayati i gatau (1P); cacaticac[u] gatau (1P); cchati gatau
prpae ca (1P) by 419, or cch[a] gatau (1P), or cch[a] gatndriya-pralaya-mrt-
bhveu (6P); sravatisru gatau (1P); gte g[] gatau (1A); calatical[a] kampane
(1P); etii[] gatau (2P); caand; katek[] gatau (1A).

2.3.27
ayate krmatyarti kriy dv-viatir
mat nirgacchati tu niryti
nikrmati nireti ca
ayateay[a] gatau (1A); krmatikram[u] pda-vikepe (1P), by 398; iyarti gatau
(3P), by 521 and 381; kriyverbs; dv-viatithe twenty-two; matare
considered; nirgacchatinir + gam[] gatau (1P); tuend of a meaning; nirytinir +
y prpane (2P); nikrmatinir + kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P), by 398; niretinir +
i[] gatau (2P); caand.
2.3.28
pryo nisararth syur ni-prv
gamanrthak tad tv gamanrth syur
yady -prv bhavanty am
pryagenerally; nisaraa-arthhave the meaning of departure; syuare; nir-
prv preceded by nir; gamana-arthakdhtus which have the sense of going,
motion; tadthen; tu only; gamana-arthhave the meaning of coming; syu
are; yadiwhen; -prvpreceded by []; bhavantiare; amthese (the
dhtus which have the sense of going, motion).
2.3.29
syt pratyvartate pratyyti
vyghoate pi ca
praty--purasar pratyvttau syur
gamanrthak
syt is; pratyvartateprati + [] + vt[u] vartane (1A); pratyytiprati + [] + y
prpane (2P); vyghoatevi + [] + ghu[a] parivartane (1A); apialso; caand;
praty--purasar which are preceded by the upendras prati or []; pratyvttau
in the sense of returning; syuare; gamana-arthakdhtus which have the sense of
going, motion.
2.3.30
anu-prvs ta eva syu sarve
nugamanrthak
aati syn mdu-gatau rigatgati ca
anu-prvthose preceded by anu; tethey; evaonly; syuare; sarveall (the
dhtus which have the sense of going, motion); anugamana-arthakhave the sense
of following; aatia[a] gatau (1P); sytis; mdu-gatauin the sense of going
gently; rigatirig[i] gatau (1P); igatiig[i] gatau (1P); caand; trayamthe three
verbs.
2.3.31
tsarati cchadma-gamane tath
haukata ity api laghate tu pluta-
gatau laghaty utphullatti ca
tsaratitsar[a] chadma-gatau (1P); chadma-gamanein the sense of going
deceptively, clandestinely; tathin that way; haukatehauk[] gatau (1A); iti
thus; apialso; laghatelagh[i] gatau (1A); tuend of a meaning; pluta-gatauin
the sense of going down; laghatilagh[i] atikramya gatau (1P); utphullatiud +
phull[a] vikasane (1P); itithus; caand.
2.3.32
bhede pluta-gater eva valgati
plavate dvayam uayate tyate
kha-gatv utpataty api
bhedein the sense of a particular kind; pluta-gateof going down; evaonly;
valgativalg[a] gatau (1P); plavateplu[] gatau (1A); dvayamthe two verbs;
uayateud + [] vihyas gatau (1A); tuend of a meaning; uyateud +
[] vihyas gatau (4A); kha-gatauin the sense of going in the sky; utpatatiud
+ pat[] gatau (1P); apialso.
2.3.33
dhvati dravati kipra-gamane javatty
api ayate cakramti dvaya
bhramaik-vidhau
dhvatidhv[u] gati-uddhyo (1U); dravatidru gatau (1P); kipra-gamanein the
sense of going quickly; javatiju gatau (sautra-dhtu, Bhat vtti 804) + [k]vi[p], by
612, or by Pini 3.2.177; iti thus; apialso; ayateya-anta of a[a] gatau (1P),
by 590; cakramticakrapi of kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P, and 4P); dvayamthe two
verbs; bhramaik-vidhauin the sense of moving unsteadily or crookedly.

2.3.34
tad-bhede bhramati bhrmyaty api
paryaatti ca bambhramti tad-
dhikye ghrate ghratti ca
tat-bhedein the sense of a particular kind of unsteadiness; bhramatibhram[u] calane
(1P); bhrmyatibhram[u] anavasthne (4P); apialso; paryaatipari + a[a] gatau
(1P); itithus; ca and; bambhramticakrapi of bhram[u] calane (1P); tad-dhikye
in the sense of more profuse unsteadiness; ghrateghr[a] bhramae (1A);
ghratighr[a] bhramae (6P); itithus; ca and.
2.3.35
cacryate jagamti panpadyata ity api
ya-ant ya-lug-ant ca gaty-arth
kuile game
cacryatenipta of the ya-anta of car[a] gatau (1P), by Bhat 834, 843; jagamti
cakrapi of gam[] gatau (1P); panpadyateya-anta of pad[a] gatau (4A), (Bhat
vtti 834); itithus; apialso; ya-antthose at whose end there is the pratyaya
ya[]; ya-lug-antthe cakrapis (those at whose end there is deletion of ya[]); ca
and; gaty-arthwhich have the meaning of gati; kuile gamewhen the going is
crooked (see 590).
2.3.36
valate parivttau syd ghoate
parivartate
agre purati ncais tu phakkaty atati
valateval savarae sacarae ca (1A); parivttauin the sense of a return; sytis;
ghoate ghu[a] parivartane (1A); parivartatepari + vt[u] vartane (1A); agrein
the sense of preceding; puratipur agra-gamane (6P); ncaiin a low way, or slowly;
tubut; phakkatiphakk[a] ncair gatau (1P); atatiat[a] statya-gamane (1P);
santatein the sense of continuousness.
2.3.37
kutsite drti vikale dvaya khajati
khoati pavate vti vtasya vahati
pravahaty apm
kutsitein the sense of being contemptible; drtidr kutsy gatau (2P); vikalein
the sense of limping; dvayamthe two verbs; khajatikhaj[i] gati-vaikalye (1P); khoati
59
khol[] gati- pratighte (1P) ; pavatep[] pavane (1A); vtiv gati-
gandhanayo (2P); vtasyaof the wind;
vahati vah[a] prpae (1U); pravahatipra + vah[a] prpae (1U); apmof water.
2.3.38
dhoraty uttama-vhder
vatsasykate krame
udgacchaty udaye a syur ujjihta
dhoratidhor[] gati-cturye (1P); uttama-vha-deof the best of carriers and so
on; vatsasyaof a calf; kate[] + k[] gatau (1A); kramein the sense of the
going; udgacchatiud + gam[] gatau (1P); udayein the sense of a rising; athe
six verbs; syuare; ujjihteud + [o]h[] gatau (3A), by 523, 535; udyateud +
[] gatau (4A).
2.3.39
udacaty udayaty etv tmane dvv udeti
ca

udacatiud + ac[u] gatau (1U); udayatinma-dhtu of udac + []i, by Bhat vtti

903; etau these; tmanein the tmanepada (thus including udayateud + ay[a]
gatau (1A)); dvauthe two verbs; udetiud + i[] gatau (2P); caand; gaty-arth
which have the meaning of gati; prya generally; ut-prvpreceded by ud;
udayasyaof the state of rising; abhidhyakexpressive.
2.3.40
unmlaty unnamati ca meghdy-
abhyudgame dvayam kramyate
ckramate jyoti-kartka udgame
unmlatiud + ml[a] nimeae (1P); unnamatiud + am[a] prahvatve abde ca
(1P); caand; megha-dy-abhyudgamein the sense of the ascension of clouds and so
on; dvayamthe two verbs;
59
Kholati optionally becomes khoati because la-rma and a-rma are interchangable: a-layo ra-
layo ca prya-ekatva- ravat (Bhat vtti 128).
kramyate[] + kram[u] pda-vikepe (4P); caand; kramate[] +
kram[u] pda-vikepe

2.3.41
styyatti prasarati prasre visaraty
api
sacre sacaraty etat tty-yuktam
styyatistyai abda-saghtayo (1P); itithus; prasaratipra + s gatau (1P);
prasrein the sense of spreading, extending; visarativi + s gatau (1P); apialso;
sacrein the sense of going together, riding, roaming; sacaratisam + car[a] gatau
(1P); etatthe verb; tty-yuktam connected with a word ending in a tty
viubhakti; tmanein the tmanepada.
2.3.42
srasate dho-gatau bhrayaty api
bhrasata ity api pataty api dravdes tu
karati cyavate tath
srasatesrans[u] adha-patane (1A); adho-gatauin the sense of going down;
bhrayati bhra[u] adha-patane (4P); apialso; bhrasatebhrans[u] adha-
patane (1A); itithus; api also; patatipat[] gatau (1P); apialso; drava-deof
liquids and so on; tuend of a meaning; karatikar[a] sacalane (1P); cyavate
cyu[] gatau (1A); tathand.
2.3.43
skandati cyotati tath sravaty
apgalaty api ryate syandate ctra
saratti kriy nava
skandatiskand[ir] gati-oaayo (gatir atra skhalanam) (1P); cyotaticyut[ir]
karae (1P); tathin that way; sravatisru gatau (1P); apgalatiapa + [] +
gal[a] adane asane ca (1P); apialso; ryater[] sravae (4A); syandate
syand[] prasravae (1A); caand; atrain this regard; saratis gatau (1P); iti
thus; kriyverbs; navanine.
2.3.44
vilyate dravati ca kahora-karae
dvayam
asta-game stamayate nimlocaty
vilyatevi + l[] leane (4A); dravatidru gatau (1P); caand; kahora-karae
in the sense of the flowing of the solid; dvayamthe two verbs; asta-gamein the
sense of going to the western mountain; astamayate astam + ay[a] gatau (1A);
nimlocatini + mluc[u] gatau (1P); astameti astam + i[] gatau (2P); caand.

2.3.45
antardhne tiro-ntarbhym ubhe dhatte
dadhti ca apakrmaty apaitti nayaty api

antardhnein the sense of disappearing; tiras-antarbhymafter the words tiras and

antar; ubhe the two verbs; dhatte[u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); dadhti
[u]dh[] dhraa- poaayo (3U); caand; apakrmatiapa + kram[u] pda-
vikepe (1P) by 398; apaitiapa + i[] gatau (2P); itithus; nayatia[a] adarane
(4P); apialso; palyatepar + ay[a] gatau (1A), by Bhat 595.

2.3.46
prypa-prv gaty-arth apayne
prakrtit
prya-apa-prvwhich are generally preceded by apa; gaty-arthdhtus having
the sense of gati; apaynein the sense of retreating, going away; prakrtitare
known; par-mukhatvein the sense of turning the face away; tuend of a meaning;
parvartatepar + vt[u] vartane (1A); caand; parcatipar + ac[u] gati-
pjanayo (1P).
2.3.47
atikrmaty uccarate tathticaratty api
atyety ullaghayaty-dy dhtava syur
atikrame
atikrmatiati + kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P) by 398; uccarateud + car[a] gatau (1P);
athastart of a meaning; aticaratiati + car[a] gatau (1P); itithus; apialso; atyeti
ati + i[] gatau (2P); ullaghayaticausative of ud + lag[i] gatau (1P); dyand so
on; dhtavadhtus; syuare; atikramein the sense of passing over,
transgressing.
2.3.48
niksane nikramayaty avakarati
ctra hi niklayati nisrayati cety-

niksanein the sense of expelling, driving away; nikramayaticausative of nir +

kram[u] pda- vikepe (1P, and 4P); avakaratiava + k[a] vilekhane karae ca
(1P); caand; atrain this regard; hipda-prae; niklayatinir + kal[a] kepe
(10P); nisrayaticausative of nir + s gatau (1P, and 3P); caand; ity-daya
kriythese verbs and so on.
2.3.49
pravse tu pravasati tath vivasatty api
rae bhikramate atrn praty abhyeti
mato gatau
pravsein the sense of living abroad; tuend of a meaning; pravasatipra + vas[a]
nivse (1P); tathand; vivasativi + vas[a] nivse (1P); itithus; apialso; raein
the sense of a battle (as a reason to delight); abhikramateabhi + kram[u] pda-
vikepe (1P); atrnenemies; prati towards; abhyetiabhi + i[] gatau (2P); mata
considered; gatauin the sense of going, motion.
2.3.50
abhiyoge bhyavaskandaty abhiyukta iti
dvayam

abhiyogein the sense of an energetic effort, exertion; abhyavaskandatiabhi + ava +

skand[ir] gati- oaayo (1P); abhiyukteabhi + yuj[ir] yoge (7U); itithus; dvayam
the two verbs; senay with an army; tuend of a meaning; abhiynein the sense of
attacking; sytis; abhieayatiabhi
+ sena + []i, by Bhat 898; itithus; adathe verb.
2.3.51
sannikarati tu pratysdaty sdatty
api parasmai sannikate sannidhatte ca

sannikaratisam + ni + k[a] vilekhane karae ca (1P); tuend of a meaning;

pratysdatiprati
+ [] + ad[] viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu (1P, and 6P), by 419; sdati[] +
ad[] viaraa-gaty- avasdaneu (1P, and 6P), by 419; itithus; apialso; parasmai
in the parasmaipada; sannikate sam + ni + k[a] vilekhane (6U); sannidhatte
sam + ni + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); ca and; sannidhauin the sense of
2.3.52
prptau prpnoti labhate vindate
nuruaddhi ca anurundhe bhvayate
prptauin the sense of obtaining; prpnotipra + p[] vyptau (5P); labhate
[u]labh[a] prptau (1A); vindatevid[] lbhe (6U); anuruaddhianu +
rudh[ir] varae (7U); caand; anurundhe anu + rudh[ir] varae (7U), by 78;
bhvayatebh prptau (ay-antas tbhayapad) (10A, yuj-di); vindativid[]
lbhe (6U); sdayaticausative of [] + ad[] viaraa-gaty- avasdaneu (1P
and 6P); apialso.
2.3.53
vypnoti vyanute vyptau vevety
tmane pi ca parypnoti tu aknoti
kamate prabhavaty api
vypnotivi + p[] vyptau (5P); vyanutevi + a[] vyptau (5A); vyptauin the
sense of pervading; veveivi[] vyptau (3U); itithus; tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; caand; parypnotipari + p[] vyptau (5P); tu end of a
meaning; aknotiak[] aktau (5P); kamate kam [s] sahane (1A); prabhavati
pra + bh sattym (1P); apialso.
2.3.54
kalpate prayati ca smarthye tra
padni a
udyame cvagurate udgrayata ity
kalpatekp[] smarthye (1A), by 462; prayatipra karma-samptau (10P); ca
and; smarthyein the sense of being able, fit for; atrain this regard; padniwords;
athe six verbs; udyamein the sense of endeavoring, making an effort; caand;
avagurateava + gur[] udyame (6A); udgrayateud + gr[a] udyame (10A); iti
thus; apialso.
2.3.55
udyacchati tathodyukte syu
pacodyacchate pi ca
veane veata iti parikipati ctmane
udyacchatiud + yam[u] uparame (1P), by 399; tathand; udyukteud + yuj[ir]
yoge (7U); syuare; pacathe five verbs; udyacchateud + yam[u] uparame (1P),
by 399, and Bhat 1172; apialso; caand; veanein the sense of surrounding;
veateve[a] veane (1A); itithus; parikipatipari + kip[a] prerae (6U); ca
and; tmanein the tmanepada.
2.3.56
parirayati ceti dve veayaty-dayo pi
ca niruaddhi nighty tmane ca dvau
nirodhane
parirayatipari + ri[] sevym (1U); caand; itithus; dvethe two verbs;
veayaticausative of ve[a] veane (1A); dayaand so on; apialso; caand;
niruaddhini + rudh[ir] varae (7U); nightini + grah[a] updne (9U); tmane
in the tmanepada; caand; dvauthe two verbs; nirodhanein the sense of
restraining.
2.3.57
jayaty kramati tath dharayaty api
dharati vilaghayaty abhibhavaty api ca

jayatiji jaye (1P); kramati[] + kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P); tathand;

dharayatidh[a] prahasane (10P, yuj-di); apialso; dharatidh[a]
prahasane (10P, yuj-di); vilaghayati causative of vi + lagh[i] atikramya gatau
(1P); abhibhavatiabhi + bh sattym (1P); apialso; ca and; nyak-karotinyac
(ni + ac[u]) + [u]k[] karae (8U); caand.
2.3.58
tath vijayate cskandatty
abhibhave nava
vieayaty atiaye viinai
prakarati
tathin that way; vijayatevi + ji jaye (1P), by 723; caand; skandati[] +
skand[ir] gati- oaayo (gatir atra skhalanam) (1P); itithus; abhibhavein the sense
of overpowering, disrespecting, humiliating; navathe nine verbs; vieayativi+i[a]
atiaye (10P, yuj-di); atiaye in the sense of preeminence; viinaivi + i[]
vieae (7P); prakaratipra + k[a] vilekhane karae ca (1P).

2.3.59
vieaty atiete ca tathotkarayatti
ca utkyate dvaya karma-kartary
atrricyate
vieativi+i[a] atiaye (10P, yuj-di); atieteati + [] svapne (2A); caand;
tathin that way; utkarayaticausative of ud + k[a] vilekhane karae ca (1P); iti
thus; caand; utkyateud + k[a] vilekhane karae ca (1P); dvayamthe two
verbs; karma-kartarikarma-kartari prayoga (639); atrain this regard; ricyate[] +
ric[a] viyojana-sampacanayo (10P, yuj-di).
2.3.60
vismyayati vismerayati citryate
dbhute dhnane kampayaty atra

vismyayaticausative of vi + mi[] ad-dhasane (1A); vismerayatinma-dhtu of

vismera + tat karoti []i; citryatenma-dhtu of citra + [k]ya[n], by Bhat 887;
adbhutein the sense of amazement; dhnanein the sense of agitating; kampayati
causative of kap[i] calane (1A); atrain this regard; tathfurther; vepayaticausative
of [u]vep[] calane (1A); itithus; caand.
2.3.61
traya dhunoti dhnoti dhuntty
tmane pi ca dhuvaty eva dhnayati
calayaty api cakam
trayamthe three verbs; dhunotidh[] kampane (5U); dhnotidh[] kampane (5U);
dhuntidh[] kampane (9U, pv-di); itithus; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;
caand; dhuvatidh vidhnane (6P); evamin this way; dhnayaticausative of
dh[] kampane (5U, 9U, and 10U), by 573; calayaticausative of cal[a] kampane (1P);
apialso; caand; aakamthe eight verbs.

2.3.62
ndolayati tad-bhede tath
prekholayaty api dolayaty api ca

ndolayatindola clane (10P); tat-bhedein the sense of a particular kind of

agitating; tathin that way; prekholayatiprekhola clane (10P); apialso; dolayati
60
dul[a] utkepe (10P) ; api also; caand; prekhayaticausative of pra + ikh[i]
gatau (1P); hindolayatihindola clane (10P);
apialso.
2.3.63
vidhyati bhramayati vighrayati ca
trayam viloayati mathnti ghate
manthatty api trsane trsayaty
atra bhyayaty api khaati
vidhyati[] + vyadh[a] tane (4P), by 473; bhramayaticausative of bhram[u]
anavasthne (4P); vighrayaticausative of vi + ghr[a] bhramae (1A, and 6P); ca
also; trayamthe three verbs; viloayaticausative of vi + lo[] unmde (1P);
mathntimanth[a] viloane (9P); ghate
60
The dhtu dul[a] utkepe (10P) can be found in Mdhavy
dhtu-vtti.
gh[] viloane (1A); manthatimanth[a] viloane (1P); itithus; apialso; trsane
in the sense of frightening, alarming; trsayaticausative of tras[] udvege (1P, and
4P); atrain this regard; bhyayaticausative of [i]bh bhaye (3P); apialso; khaati
kha kkym (1P).
2.3.64
prayojakd bhaye bhayate
bhpayate ca v tath kuhayate
vismpayate ceti tad-bhidi
prayojakd bhayewhen there is fear caused by the prayojaka; bhayatenipta of
the causative of [i]bh bhaye (3P), by 574; bhpayatenipta of the causative of
[i]bh bhaye (3P), by 574; caand; vor; tathin that way; kuhayatekuha
vismpane (10A); vismpayatenipta of the causative of mi[] ad-dhasane (1A),
by 574; caand; itithus; tad-bhidiin the sense of a particular kind of fear.

2.3.65
kampe tu kampate tv agaty ejaty atra
ca vepate lolatti kriy a syu
pariplavata ity api
kampein the sense of trembling, shaking; tuend of a meaning; kampatekap[i]
calane (1A); tu pda-prae; agatiag[i] gatau (1P); ejatiej[] kampane (1P); atra
61
in this regard; caand; vepate[u]vep[] calane (1A); lolatilul[a] viloane (1P) ; iti
thus; kriyverbs; asix; syuare; pariplavatepari + plu[] gatau (1A); iti
thus; apialso.
2.3.66
prasvinn-bhavati svede tath
prasvidyatti ca hanti tayati ca
tane jsayaty api
prasvinn-bhavatipra + svinna + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776,
1276, 1277, and 612; svedein the sense of sweating; tathin that way; prasvidyati
pra + [i]vid[] gtra- prakarae (4P); itithus; caand; hanti[] + han[a]
his-gatyo (2P); tayatita[a] ghte (10P); caand; tanein the sense of
striking, beating; jsayatijas[u] tane (10P); apialso.
2.3.67
haraty tmane ctha tad-bhede
kuayaty api sphlayaty ardayati
tathaivodghaayaty api
haratih[] harae (1U); tmanein the tmanepada; caand; athastart of a
meaning; tat- bhedein the sense of a particular way of striking; kuayatiku[a]
chedane (10P); apialso; sphlayaticausative of [] + sphal[a] (originally from
sphul[a] sacalane (6P)); ardayatiard[a] hisym (10U); tathin that way; eva
only; udghaayatiud + gha[a] calane (10P); apialso.
2.3.68
vidhyati cchedayaty atra vedhe
bhedayati trayam hate karmakatve syt
svakyge ca karmai
vidhyativyadh[a] tane (4P); chedayaticausative of chid[ir] dvidh-karae (7U);
atrain this regard; vedhein the sense of piercing, wounding; bhedayaticausative
of bhid[ir] vidrae (7U); trayamthe three verbs; hate[] + han[a] his-gatyo
(2P); akarmakatvewhen akarmaka; sytis; svakya-agein the sense of ones
own people; caand; karmaiin karmai prayoga.
2.3.69
yudhyate sampraharate sagrmayata
ity api vighti vighte samare
kalahyate
61
The dhtu lul[a] viloane (1P) can be found in Mdhavy dhtu-vtti. It is similar to the dhtu
lu[a] viloane (1P).
yudhyateyudh[a] samprahre (4A); sampraharatesam + pra + h[] harae (1U);
sagrmayate sagrma yudhe (10A); itithus; apialso; vightivi + grah[a]
updne (9U); vighte vi + grah[a] updne (9U); samarein the sense of a battle,
a war; kalahyatenma-dhtu of kalaha + [k]ya[], by 613.

2.3.70
nidhvnayati akhder dhvanane tra
dhamaty api
vder vdayaty atra tath vdayate pi
nidhvnayaticausative of ni + dhvan [a] abde (1P); akha-deof the conchshell
and so on; dhvananein the sense of the sound; atrain this regard; dhamatidhm
abdgni-sayogayo (1P), by 419; apialso; v-deof a lute and so on;
vdayaticausative of vad[a] vyakty vci (1P); atrain this regard; tathin that
way; vdayatecausative of vad[a] vyakty vci (1P); apialso; caand.

2.3.71
kvayaty atra raayaty api prakvayaty
api kveati siha-vad-nde bhu-
yuddhe niyudhyate
kvayaticausative of kva[a] abde (1P); atrain this regard; raayaticausative of
ra[a] abde (1P); apialso; prakvayaticausative of pra + kva[a] abde (1P); api
62
also; kveati [i]kvid[] avyakte abde (1P) ; siha-vat-ndein the sense of
roaring like a lion; bhu-yuddhe
in the sense of fighting with the hands; niyudhyateni + yudh[a] samprahre (4A).
2.3.72
parkrame vrayate
parkramata ity api ojyate
rayate tath vikramate pi ca
parkramein the sense of being powerful, heroic; vrayatevra vikrntau (10A);
parkramate par + kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P); itithus; apialso; ojyatenma-
dhtu of ojas + [k]ya[], by 609; rayatera vikrntau (10A); tathin that way;
vikramatevi + kram[u] pda-vikepe (1P); apialso; caand.

2.3.73
pragalbhate pragalbhatve tatra
corjasvalyate aru-karoty tmane pi
vraayaty aga-crane
pragalbhatepra + galbh[a] dhrye (1A); pragalbhatvein the sense of being bold,
brave, impudent; tatrain that regard; caand; rjasvalyatenma-dhtu of
rjasvala + [k]ya[]; aru- karotiaru + [u]k[] karae (8U); tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; vraayativraa gtra-vicrane (10P); aga-cranein the
sense of wounding body parts.
2.3.74
go-kartky hisy prastumpati su-
gamt hinasti sajapayati sdate hanti
tardati
go-kartkymin the sense of the doers of the senses; hisymin the sense of
hurting, killing; prastumpatipra + tunp[a] hisym (6P); su-gamtbecause of
63
the insertion of s[u] ; hinasti his[i] hisym (7P); sajapayatisam + jap[a]
(jna-jpana-)mradau (10P); sdate

62
The dhtu [i]kvid[] (1P) can be found in Mdhavy dhtu-vtti. Monier-Williams dictionary
says the dhtu [i]kvi[] is from [i]kvid[].
63
The insertion of s[u] takes place by praskara-prabhtni sajym (Bhat 2025).
d[a] kaane (kaana his) (1A); hantihan[a] his-gatyo (2P); tardatitard[a]
hisym

2.3.75
pramthayaty ardayate nirvpayati
hisati thati ghtayati ca ty

pramthayaticausative of pra + manth[a] viloane (1P); ardayateard[a] hisym

(10A); nirvpayaticausative of nir + v gati-gandhanayo (2P), by 571; hisatihis[i]
hisym (10P, yuj- di); thatith[] hisym (6P); ghtayaticausative of han[a]
his-gatyo (2P), by 577; ca and; ti hisym (9P, pv-di); ujjsayatiud +
jas[u] tane (10P); apialso.
2.3.76
pratikiraty labhate kaate mrayaty
api kaaty unmthayaty atra kiotty
64
pratikiratiprati + k vikepe (6P) ; labhate[] + [u]labh[a] prptau (1A);
65
kaateka[a] hisym (1P) ; mrayaticausative of m[] pra-tyge (6A); api
also; kaatika[a] hisym (1P); unmthayaticausative of ud + manth[a]
viloane (1P, and 9P); atrain this regard;
kiotiki[u] hisym (8U); itithus; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; ca
2.3.77
kaoti dve viasati nistarhayati
radhyati
a-viati sdayati hisy
kaotika[u] hisym (8U); dvethe two verbs; viasativi + as[u] hisym
(1P); nistarhayaticausative of nir + th[a] hisym (7P); radhyatirdh[a]
sasiddhau (4P); a- viatitwenty-six; sdayaticausative of d[a] kaane
(kaana his) (1A); hisymin the sense of hurting, killing; hisayatihis[i]
hisym (10P); apialso.
2.3.78
koti kute puthyaty api krathati
tumpati mnty unnayaty-dy
hisy viraloday
kotik[] hisym (5U); kutek[] hisym (5U); puthyatiputh[a] hisym
(4P); apialso; krathatikrath[a] hisym (1P); tumpatitunp hisym (6P); mnti
m[] himsym (9U); unnayatiud + na[a] avasyandane (avasyandana
66
nyam) (10P) ; dyand
so on; hisymin the sense of hurting, killing; virala-udayseldom arising.
2.3.79
ardane lumbayaty atra lumbaty ardayaty
api trayam
pane tu vyathayati klinti ca dunoti ca
ardane in the sense of tormenting; lumbayatilub[i] adarane (10U); atrain this
regard; lumbatilub[i] ardane (1P); ardayatiard[a] hisym (10U); apialso; trayam
the three verbs; panein the sense of pressing, oppressing, supressing; tuend of
a meaning; vyathayaticausative of vyath[a] bhaye dukhe calane ca (1A, gha-di);
klintikli[] vibdhane (9P); caand; dunoti[u]du upatpe (5P); caand.

64
The insertion of s[u] takes place by praskara-prabhtni sajym (Bhat 2025).
65
Why the dhtu ka[a] hisym (1P) is also atmapad is unclear. Kaati is also seen in this verse. In
his Dhtu-pha,
Jva Gosvm says ka[a] is parapad only. This is confirmed by Mdhavy dhtu-vtti. The verb
ka[a] is not mentioned in khyta-candrik.
66
The dhtu a[a] ntau (1P) is a gha-di.
2.3.80
tapati glpayaty atra bdhate
payaty api dhpyati glapayati
tudati kleayaty api
tapatitap[a] santpe (1P); glpayaticausative of glai hara-kaye (1P), by 571; atra
in this regard; bdhatebdh[] vilodane (1A); payatip[a] avaghane dukha-
kriyy ca (10P); apialso; dhpyatidhp[a] santpe (1P) + ya, by 392; glapayati
causative of glai hara-kaye (1P, gha-di v), by 571; tudatitud[a] vyathane (6U);
kleayaticausative of kle[a] bdhane (1A); apialso.
2.3.81
dukh-karoty tmane pi tudate
khedayaty api dukhayaty utklamayati

dukh-karotidukha + [c] + [u]k[] karae (8U), by Bhat 3170; tmanein the

tmanepada; apialso; tudatetud[a] vyathane (6U); khedayaticausative of khid[a]
parighte(6P); apialso; dukhayaticausative of dukha tat-kriyym (10P);
utklamayaticausative of ud + klam[u] glnau (1P, and 4P); sytis; kadarthayati
nma-dhtu of kad-artha + tat karoti []i; itithus; apialso.
2.3.82
bhanakti troayati ca rujaty mardayaty
api bhajayaty atha tad-bhede

bhanaktibhanj[o] mardane (7P); troayaticausative of tru[a] chedane (4P, and

6P); caand; rujatiruj[o] bhage (6P); mardayaticausative of [] + md[a] kode
(9P); apialso; bhajayaticausative of bhanj[o] mardane (7P); athastart of a
meaning; tat-bhedein the sense of a particular way of oppressing; moayatimu[a]
sacrane (10P); apialso; moatimu[a] pramardane (1P).

2.3.83
mardayaty atra muati manthayaty
atha peae kuatti mradate kunte

mardayaticausative of md[a] kode (9P); atrain this regard; muatimu[a]

kepa-mardanayo (6P); manthayaticausative of math[i] his-sakleanayo (1P);
athastart of a meaning; peae in the sense of pounding, crushing, grinding;
kuattikud[ir] sampeae (7U); mradatemrad[a] mardane (1A); kuntekud[ir]
sampeae (7U), by 78; mdntimd[a] kode (9P); caand; pinaipi[]
sacrane (7P); caand.
2.3.84
sacrayaty atha dhvasayati
kapayatty api
nane nayati ca tisro
sacrayatisam + cr[a] peae (10P); athastart of a meaning; dhvasayati
causative of dhvans[u] adha-patane (1A); kapayaticausative of ki kaye(1P); iti
thus; apialso; nanein the sense of destruction; nayaticausative of a[a]
adarane (4P); caand; tisrathree; atha start of a meaning; unmlana-kriy
verbs which have the sense of pulling up by the roots, destruction.

2.3.85
unmlayaty utkhanati tathojjaayatti
ca utpayaty utkhanate a
uddharati ctmane
unmlayaticausative of ud + ml[a] pratihym (1P); utkhanatiud + khan[u]
avadrae (1U);
tathand; ujjaayaticausative of ud + ja[a] saghte (1P); itithus; caand;
causative of ud + pa[a] gatau (1P); utkhanateud + khan[u] avadrae (1U); a
six; uddharati ud + dh[] dhrae (1U); caand; tmanein the tmanepada.

2.3.86
ullucatti keder utpana-vidhau
kriy
dvidh-ktau payati phlayaty
ullucatiud + luc[a] apanayane (1P); itithus; kea-deof hair and so on;
utpana-vidhauin the sense of pulling up by the roots; kriythe verb; dvidh-ktau
in the sense of dividing in two; payaticausative of pa[a] gatau (1P); phlayati
causative of phal[a] nipattau (nipattir nipdana pratiphalana ca) (1P); auka-
dinaof clothes and so on.
2.3.87
nipayati nicyotayati nirghtayaty
api

nipayatinir + p[a] avaghane dukha-kriyy ca (10P); nicyotayaticausative

of nir + cyut[ir] secane (1P); nirghtayaticausative of nir + han[a] his-gatyo (2P),
by 577; apialso; vaira-uddhauin the sense of reciprocation of enmity; pratikaroti
prati + [u]k[] karae (8U); atrain this regard; nirytayatinir + yat[a]
nikropaskrayo (nira ca pratidne) (10P); apialso.
2.3.88
bhage parbhavaty atra parjayata ity api
jayaty utkara-samprptau dvaya
vijayate pi ca
bhagein the sense of defeating; parbhavatipar + bh sattym (1P); atrain
this regard; parjayatepar + ji jaye (1P); itithus; apialso; jayatiji jaye (1P);
utkara-samprptauin the sense of gaining eminence; dvayamthe two verbs;
vijayatevi + ji jaye (1P); apialso; caand.
iti katriya-ce-
varga
itithus ends; katriya-ce-vargathe section on the specific activities
of katriyas.

Now we begin the section on the specific activities of

katriyas.
2.3.1
Aivarye
Indati, e, tapyate, and adhe mean to be powerful,
in control.
2.3.1
Pratihptau
Vikhyti, prakhyti, and pratihati mean to be well
known.
2.3.2
Rakae
Tryate, pti, gopyati, bhunakti, piparti, rakati, playati, and avati mean
to protect.
2.3.3
iau
sti and ikayati mean to command,
correct.
2.3.3
Da
e
Daayati and dmyati means to
punish.
2.3.3
Va-kre
Dhrayati, dhrayate, va-karoti, va-kurute, saghti, and saghte mean
to bring under control.

2.3.4
aragatau
Prapadyate and araayati mean to
surrender.
2.3.5
Utkocdi-va-ktau
Parikrte means to win over with a bribe and
so on.
2.3.5
yattau
yatate and va-bhavati mean to become controlled,
subject to.
2.3.6
Sthir-ktau
Sthpayati and drahayati mean to place,
make firm.
2.3.6
Dhrarthe
Dhrayati, dadhti, dadhatte, bibharti, bibhte, dadhate, and dharati mean to
hold, bear.
2.3.8
jym
Niyukte, jpayati, nidiati, nidiate, diati, and diate mean
to order.
2.3.8
Preae
Prasthpayati, preayati, preyati, and prahioti mean to send,
dispatch, dismiss.
2.3.9
Sandee
Vcikayate, sandiati, and sandiate mean to send a
message.
2.3.9
Akara-vinyse
Likhati and lipayati mean to
write.
2.3.10
Uddea-ktau
Udbhlayate and uddeayati mean to mention by
name.
2.3.10
Prerae
Prerayati, kipati, kipate, klayati, asyati, and nudati mean
to impel.
2.3.12
Sevy
m
Sevate, anusarati, bhajati, bhajate, rayati, rayate, anuruaddhi, anurunddhe,
anuvartate, anujvati, juate, and anucarati mean to serve.

2.3.13
Sambhaktau
Vte, vanati, vanate, saj-karoti, and saj-kurute mean to
favor, serve.
2.3.13
Shye
Satr-karoti, and satr-kurute mean to
help.
2.3.14
Prpae
Lambhayati, lambhayate, harati, harate, nayati, nayate, vahati, vahate, prpayati, and
payati mean to lead, take to (another place).

When dhtus which mean to go end in []i, they are considered synonyms of
67
the dhtu [].
2.3.16
Vilambe
Vilambate, kuhati, vykipati, vykipate, mandyate, and cirayati mean to
be late, slow.
Pratkate, anuplayati, and pratiplayati mean to
68
wait.
2.3.17
Dvra-praveana-vidhau
Pratihrayati means to be announced at the
door.
2.3.17
Tvarym
Sambhrmyati, tvarate, sambhramati, and vijate mean
to hurry.
2.3.18
Vaiklavye
Viklavati, vihvalati, and alati mean to be
agitated.
2.3.18
Klaibye
Klbate and klbyate mean to be
impotent.
2.3.19
Kauilye
Vakate, kuati, bhujati, and nyubjati, kucati, and krucati mean to be
crooked.
2.3.20
Gupta-vde
Mantrayate means to speak
confidentially.

67
Causatives made from dhtus that have the sense of gati in the Dhtu-pha are synonyms of []
prpae. It is stated in the Kraka-prakaraa that the idea of prpti (attainment) is included within
the idea of gati (vtti 641). So any verb that means to go can also theoretically mean to attain.
Prpaa is made from pra + p[] + []i + ana. Thus it means causing to attain. So, when gaty-
artha dhtus are causatives, they also mean to cause to attain and are thus synonyms of []. For
example, leading or taking somebody to a place means causing them to go to or in other words to
attain that place.
68
In khyta-candrik (2.3.18) these verbs come under the separate heading pratkym.
2.3.20
Tad-bhede
Upajapati means to whisper something secret in
the ear.
2.3.20
Dambhecchym
Dhpsati, didambhiati, and dhipsati mean to desire to
deceive.
2.3.21
Sannhe
Savarmayati, sannahyati, sannahyate, sajjayati, and daayate mean to
equip armor.
2.3.22
Adhiayane
Adhiete means to lie upon, sleep
upon.
2.3.22
Adhysane
Adhitihati and adhyste mean to sit upon,
preside over.
2.3.22
Adhivse
Adhivasati means to reside
69
in.
2.3.23
rohe
rohati and adhirohati mean to mount a horse, ascend a
chariot.
These six verbs (adhiete, adhitihati, adhyste, adhivasati, rohati, and adhirohati)
70
take a karma.
2.3.23
Spande
Sphurati and spandate mean to quiver,
throb.
2.3.23
Calane
Calati, prekhati, ghaate, and vellati mean to shake.

Utsedhati, unnahyati, unnahyate, ucchrayati, and ucchrayate mean to

71
raise, erect.
2.3.25
Kobhe
Kobhate, and kubhyati mean to be agitated, be
nervous.
2.3.25
Gamane
Acati, gacchati, pratihate, jihte, sarati, vrajati, yate, padyate, yti, carati,
sarpati, ayati, cacati, cchati, sravati, gte, calati, eti, kate, ayate, krmati, and
iyarti mean to go.
2.3.2
8
69
When this is causative it means to make the devat reside in the deity form. See Aptes Practical
Sanskrit English dictionary.
70
The stras are adhi--sthsm dhra karma (650) and upnv-adhy-bhyo vasa dhra karma
(651) respectively.
71
In khyta-candrik (2.3.30) these verbs come under the separate heading ucchrye.
Nisararth gamanrthak
Nirgacchati, niryti, nikrmati, and nireti mean to depart.
Generally, dhtus which have the sense of gati mean to depart when they are
preceded by the
upendra nir.
2.3.28
gamanrth gamanrthak
Generally, dhtus which have the sense of gati mean to come when they are
preceded by the
upendra [].
2.3.29
Pratyvttau gamanrthak
Pratyvartate, pratyyti, and vyghoate mean to return.
Generally, dhtus which have the sense of gati mean to return when they are
preceded by the
upendras prati or [].
2.3.30
Anugamanrthak gamanrthak
Generally, dhtus which have the sense of gati mean to follow when they are
preceded by the
upendra anu.
2.3.30
Mdu-gatau
Aati, rigati, and igati mean to go or move
gently.
2.3.31
Chadma-gamane
Tsarati and haukate mean to move
stealthily.
2.3.31
Pluta-gatau
Laghate, laghati, and utphullati mean to jump,
72
leap.
2.3.32
Bhede pluta-gate
Valgati and plavate mean to jump, leap (in a
certain way).
2.3.32
Kha-gatau
Uayate, uyate, and utpatati mean
to fly.
2.3.33
Kipra-gamane
Dhvati, dravati, and javati mean to go
swiftly, run.
2.3.33
73
Bhramaik-vidhau
Ayate and cakramti mean to move unsteadily or
crookedly.
2.3.3
4
72
In Apte and Monier-Williams Sanskrit English dictionaries ud + phal[a] can mean to jump, leap.
Since phull[a] is related to phal[a] (see Bhat 1228), ud + phull[a] can also have the same meaning.
73
In this sense, vidhi is a synonym of kti (doing). For instance, vidadhti can mean karoti
(Prayuktkhyta-majar
2.1.3). The word vidhi is formed by applying [k]i after vi + dh by the stra sopendra-dmodart kir
Tad-bhede
Bhramati, bhrmyati, and paryaati mean to roam
about, totter.
2.3.34
Tad-dhikye
Bambhramti, ghrate, and ghrati mean to stagger,
roll about.
2.3.35
Kuile game
Cacryate, jagamti, and panpadyate mean to go crookedly.
Dhtus which have the sense of gati mean to go crookedly when they are conjugated
as ya-antas
or as cakrapis.
2.3.36
Parivttau
Valate, ghoate, and parivartate mean to
return.
2.3.36
Agre game
Purati means to precede, go
before.
2.3.36
Ncair game
Phakkati means to behave badly or to
74
creep.
2.3.36
Santate game
Atati means to go
continuously.
2.3.37
Kutsite game
Drti means to go in a reproachable
way.
2.3.37
Vikale game
Khajati and khoati mean to
limp.
2.3.37
Vtasya game
Pavate and vti mean to blow (in regard to the
wind).
2.3.37
Ap game
Vahati and pravahati mean to flow (in regard to
water).
2.3.38
Uttama-vhde krame
Dhorati means to trot, gallop (in regard to the motions of horses
and so on).
2.3.38
Vatsasya krame
kate means to leap (in regard to the leaping motion
of a calf).
74
The meaning of nca-gati here is asad-vyavahra (bad behavior) or, according to some
others, anair gamanam
2.3.38
Udaye
Udgacchati, ujjihte, udyate, udacati, udacate, udayati, udayate, and udeti mean to
go up, rise. Generally, dhtus which have the sense of gati mean to rise when they
are preceded by the upendra ud.

2.3.40
Meghdy-abhyudgame
Unmlati and unnamati mean to ascend (in regard to clouds
and so on).
2.3.40
Jyoti-kartka udgame
kramyate and kramate mean to rise (in regard to the
75
luminaries).
2.3.41
Jyoti-kartke prasre
Styyati, prasarati, and visarati mean to extend, spread (in
regard to light).
2.3.41
Sacre
Sacarati and sacarate mean to go together, ride, roam. Sacarate is used only with
76
a word that ends in a tty viubhakti.

2.3.42
Adho-gatau
Srasate, bhrayati, bhrasate, and patati mean
to fall.
2.3.42
Dravder gatau
Karati, cyavate, skandati, cyotati, sravati, apgalati, ryate, syandate, and
sarati mean to flow, trickle.

2.3.44
Kahora-karae
Vilyate and dravati mean to become fluid,
dissolve.
2.3.44
Asta-game
Astamayate, nimlocati, and astameti mean to set (in regard
to the sun).
2.3.45
Antardhne
Antardhatte, antardadhti, tirodhatte, and tirodadhti mean to
disappear.
2.3.46
Apayne
Apakrmati, apaiti, nayati, and palyate mean to go away from, retreat.
Often, dhtus which have the sense of gati mean to go away from when they are
preceded by the
upendra apa.

75
tmapada endings are applied after the [] + kram[u] by tath-prvj jyotir-udgama iyate
(Bhat 1144).
76
Rpa Gosvm is referring to Pini: samas tty-yuktt (Adhyy 1.3.54). Kik says:
sam-prvc carates tty- yuktd tmanepada bhavati. Kik gives the example avena
2.3.46
Par-mukhatve
Parvartate and parcati mean to turn
back.
2.3.47
Atikrame
77
Atikrmati, uccarate , aticarati, atyeti, and verbs such as ullaghayati and so on mean
to pass over, transgress.

2.3.48
Niksane
Nikramayati, avakarati, niklayati, and nisrayati mean to drive
away, expel.
2.3.49
Pravse
Pravasati and vivasati mean to sojourn
abroad.
2.3.49
Rae
Abhikramate means to battle,
fight.
2.3.49
78
atrn prati gatau
Abhyeti means to approach the
enemies.
2.3.50
Abhiyoge
Abhyavaskandati and abhiyukte mean to assault,
attack.
2.3.50
Senaybhiyne
Abhieayati means to march against (with an
army).
2.3.51
Sannidhau
Sannikarati, pratysdati, sdati, sannikate, sannikati, sannidhatte, and
sannidadhti mean to come into close contact with.

2.3.52
Prptau
Prpnoti, labhate, vindate, anuruaddhi, anurunddhe, bhvayate, vindati, and
sdayati mean to obtain.

2.3.53
Vyptau
Vypnoti, vyanute, vevei, and vevie mean to
pervade.
2.3.54
Smarth
ye

77
tmapada endings are applied to ud + car provided it has a karma: uda sakarma-carate (Bhat
1157).
78
Although this verse says atrn praty abhyeti, in this case prati is not an upendra but a ka-
pravacanya (672). In this regard khyta-candrik (2.3.56) has the reading dyauty abhigacchaty
abhiyty abhyety dy abhikrame. Furthermore, the verb pratyabhyeti cannot be found in the
 79
Parypnoti, parypnute, aknoti, kamate, prabhavati, kalpate, and prayati mean
to be able, fit for.

2.3.54
Udyame
Avagurate, udgrayate, udyacchati, udyukte, and udyacchate mean to endeavor,
make an effort.
2.3.55
Veane
Veate, parikipati, parikipate, parirayati, and verbs similar to veayati mean
to surround.
2.3.56
Nirodhane
Niruaddhi, nirunddhe, nighti, and nighte mean to
restrain, confine.
2.3.58
Abhibhave
Jayati, kramati, dharayati, dharati, vilaghayati, abhibhavati, nyak-karoti, nyak-
kurute, vijayate,

2.3.58
Atiaye
Vieayati, viinai, prakarati, vieati, atiete, utkarayati, as well as utkyate and
ricyate in karma- kartari prayoga mean to be preeminent, excellent, special.

2.3.60
Adbhute
Vismyayati, vismerayati, and citryate mean to cause
astonishment.
2.3.60
Dhnane
Kampayati, vepayati, dhunoti, dhunute, dhnoti, dhnute, dhunti, dhunte,
dhuvati, dhnayati, calayati, mean to agitate, disturb, shake.

2.3.62
Tad-bhede
ndolayati, prekholayati, dolayati, prekhayati, and hindolayati mean to swing (on
a swing).
vidhyati, bhramayati, and vighrayati mean to swing, spin
(transitive)
Viloayati, mathnti, ghate, and manthati mean to
churn.
2.3.63
Trsane
Trsayati, bhyayati, and khaati mean to
frighten.
2.3.64
Prayojakd
bhaye
79
The dhtu pra (10P) is also used in the tmapada. For example: na praye ha calitum, I am
unable to walk any further (Bhgavatam 10.30.37), and na praye 'ha niravadya-sayuj sva-
sdhu-ktyam, which rdhara Svm explains as vibudhnm yupi cira-klenpi svya sdhu-
ktya pratyupakra kartu na praye na aknomi (Bhvrtha-dpik 10.32.22). Other synonymns
of the dhtu ak[] aktau (5P) include [a] aivarye (2A, to be master of, to be able), as well as
ah[a], which is generally preceded by the upendra ud when used with tum[u]. Thus we get katha
ts tyaktum utsahe (How can I give up such devotees?) in Bhgavatam 9.4.65. For a thorough
discussion on this topic, one may consult Commentary 791.
Bhayate and bhpayate mean to frighten (when the prayojaka
80
causes fear).
2.3.64
Tad-bhidi
Kuhayate and vismpayate mean to astonish (when the prayojaka causes
81
fear also).
2.3.65
Kampe
Kampate, agati, ejati, vepate, lolati, and pariplavate mean to
tremble, shake.
2.3.66
Svede
Prasvinn-bhavati and prasvidyati mean to
sweat.
2.3.66
Tane
hanti, tayati, jsayati, harati, and harate mean to
strike, beat.
2.3.67
Tad-bhede
Kuayati, sphlayati, ardayati, and udghaayati mean to strike (in a
certain way).
2.3.68
Vedhe
Vidhyati, chedayati, and bhedayati mean to pierce,
wound.
82
hate is akarmaka but it can become sa-karmaka when ones own limb is
83
the karma.
2.3.69
Samare
Yudhyate, sampraharate, sagrmayate, vighti, vighte, and kalahyate mean
to fight at war.
2.3.70
akhder dhvanane
Nidhvnayati and dhamati mean to sound, blow (in regard to a conchshell,
and so on).
2.3.70
Vder dhvanane
Vdayati, vdayate, kvayati, raayati, and prakvayati mean to sound (in regard
to a lute, and other musical instruments).

2.3.71
Siha-vad-nde
Kveati means to roar (like a
lion).

80
For example, bhayate kasa hari or bhpayate kasa hari (Hari frightens Kasa). Why do we
say caused by the prayojaka? Consider gaja-dantena bhyayati kasa hari (Hari frightens Kasa
with the elephant tusk) (vtti 574).
81
For example, vismpayate kasa hari (Hari astonishes Kasa).Why is it said caused by the
prayojaka?
Consider gaja-dantena gaja-dantena vismyayati kasa hari (Hari astonishes Kasa with the
elephant tusk) (vtti 574).
82
This is actually karma-kartari prayoga. See -prvt tu yamer hane (Bhat 1133). For example,
hate svayam eva
(He strikes himself).
83
See svga-karmakc ca yamdita (Bhat 1135). For example, hate svya ira kopt (He strikes
2.3.71
Bhu-yuddhe
Niyudhyate means to fight (bare
handed).
2.3.72
Parkrame
84
Vrayate and parkramate mean to be powerful,
courageous, heroic.
2.3.73
Pragalbhatve
85
Ojyate, rayate, vikramate , pragalbhate, and rjasvalyate mean to be bold,
brave, impudent.
2.3.73
Aga-crane
Aru-karoti, aru-kurute, and vraayati mean to wound
bodily parts.
2.3.74
Go-kartky hisy
Prastumpati means to gore (in relation to the violence done
by a bull).
2.3.77
Hisym
Hinasti, sajapayati, sdate, hanti, tardati, pramthayati, ardayate, nirvpayati,
hisati, thati, ghtayati, ti, ujjsayati, pratikirati, labhate, kaate, mrayati,
kaati, unmthayati, kioti, kiute, kaoti, kaute, viasati, nistarhayati, radhyati,
sdayati, hisayati, koti, kute, puthyati, krathati, tumpati, and mnti mean to
86
hurt, injure, kill . Occasionally, the verbs beginning with unnayati are seen with
87
this meaning.
2.3.79
Ardane
Lumbayati, lumbati, and ardayati mean to
torment.
2.3.79
Pane
Vyathayati, klinti, dunoti, tapati, glpayati, bdhate, payati, dhpyati, glapayati,
tudati, kleayati, dukh-karoti, dukh-kurute, tudate, khedayati, dukhayati,
utklamayati, kadarthayati, bhanakti, troayati, rujati, mardayati, and bhajayati mean
to oppress, give pain.
2.3.82
Tad-bhede
Moayati, moati, mardayati, muati, and manthayati mean to oppress (in a
certain way).
2.3.83
Peae
Kuatti, mradate, kuntte, mdnti, pinai, and sacrayati mean to pound,
crush, grind.
84
tmapada endings are applied here by vtty-utsha-sphtatsu krame (Bhat 1142) and
nopendrato vin paropbhym
(Bhat 1143).
85
tmapada endings are applied here by ve pda-vihtau tadvat (Bhat 1145).
86
Additionally, any dhtu with the meaning of hisym can be conjugated like a cur-di: ye ca teu
gaeu hisrth dhtava ukts te cur-dv api jey ity artha (gaa-stra listed after dhtu
number 993 in Jva Gosvms sequential
Dhtu-pha).
87
This is in reference to Pini: jsi-ni-pra-haa-na-krtha-pi hisym (Adhyy 2.3.56).
Kik lists the verbs
2.3.84
Nane
Dhvasayati, kapayati, and nayati mean to
destroy.
2.3.84
Unmlana-kriy
Unmlayati, utkhanati, ujjaayati, utpayati, utkhanate, uddharati, and uddharate
mean to uproot.
2.3.86
88
Keder utpana-vidhau
Ullucati means to pull by the
hair.
2.3.86
Aukdino dvidh-ktau
Payati and phlayati mean to rip clothes and
so on.
Nipayati, nicyotayati, and nirghtayati mean to squeeze out, wring out (in
regard to washing clothes and so on).

2.3.87
Vaira-uddhau
pratikaroti, pratikurute, and nirytayati mean to take
revenge.
2.3.88
Bhage
89
Parbhavati and parjayate mean to
defeat.
2.3.88
Utkara-samprptau
90
Jayati and vijayate mean to gain eminence, become
glorious.

Here ends the section on the specific activities of

Vaiya-ce-
varga
2.4.1
karae katy atra kate
karaty api ca radaty eva vilikhati
khanaty api halaty api
karaein the sense of ploughing; katik[a] vilekhane (6U); atrain this regard;
katek[a] vilekhane (6U); karatik[a] vilekhane karae ca (1P); apialso; ca
and; radatirad[a] vilekhane (1P); evasimply; vilikhativi + likh[a] vilekhane (6P);
khanatikhan[u] avadrae (1U); apialso; halatihal[a] vilekhane (1P); apialso.

2.4.2
bj-karoty upta-kau syd dvity-
karoty api amb-karoti dvi-gu-karoti
dvi-kau trayam

88
In this sense, vidhi is a synonym of kti (doing). For instance, vidadhti can mean karoti
(Prayuktkhyta-majar 2.1.3). The word vidhi is formed by applying [k]i after vi + dh by the
89
stra sopendra-dmodart kir bhvdau (898). An tmapada pratyaya is applied after par + ji
by the stra vi-parbhy je (723).
90
An tmapada pratyaya is applied after vi + ji by the stra vi-parbhy je (723).
bj-karotibja + [c] + [u]k[] karae (8U), by Bhat 3165; upta-kauin the
sense of ploughing after sowing; sytis; dvity-karotidvtya + [c] + [u]k[]
karae (8U), by Bhat 3165; apialso; amb-karotiamba + [c] + [u]k[]
karae (8U), by Bhat 3165; dvi-gu- karotidvi-gua + [c] + [u]k[] karae
(8U), by Bhat 3165; dvi-kauin the sense of ploughing twice; trayamthe
three verbs.
2.4.3
tty-tri-gubhya ca karoti tri-
kau matam khytni khanaty-dny
hanyni ctmane
tty-tri-gubhyamafter tty, and tri-gua; caand; karoti[u]k[] karae
(8U); tri-kau in the sense of ploughing thrice; matamconsidered; khytnithe
verbs; khanati-dnikhanati and so on (see 2.4.1); hanynishould be understood;
caand; tmanein the tmanepada.
2.4.4
loayati saghe tath saghate pi
ca

loayaticausative of [] + lo[] unmde (1P); saghein the sense of mixing or

blending; tathin that way; saghatesam + gh[] viloane (1A); apialso; ca
and; hali-grahein the sense of grabbing a large plow; halayatinma-dhtu of hali +
[]i, by Bhat 897; halia hali; uktais said; mahat-halamto be a big plow.

2.4.5
vapaty uptau prakirati vapate py atha
ropae mlayaty api sarohayati
saropayaty api
vapati[u]vap[a] bja-tantu-santne (1U); uptauin the sense of sowing; prakirati
pra + k vikepe (6P); vapate[u]vap[a] bja-tantu-santne (1U); apialso; atha
start of a meaning; ropaein the sense of causing to grow; mlayatiml[a] rohane
(10P); apialso; sarohayati causative of sam + ruh[a] janmani prdur-bhve ca (1P);
saropayatinipta of the causative of sam
+ ruh[a] janmani prdur-bhve ca (1P), by Bhat 801; apialso.
2.4.6
sthiraty dhravaty atra mlati
pratitihati
oe tu uyati tath uhaty
sthiratymin the sense of being firm, taking root; dhravatidhru sthairye (1P); atra
in this regard; mlatiml[a] pratihym (1P); pratitihatiprati + h gati-
nivttau (1P); oein the sense of becoming dry; tuend of a meaning; uyati
u[a] oae (4P); tathin that way; uhatiuh[i] oae (1P); yyate[]
+ yai[] gatau (1P); apialso; caand.
2.4.7
vyatti ca seke tu sicaty rdr-karoti
ca tmane pi dvaya varaty rdrayaty
api kate
vyati[o]vai oae (1P); itithus; caand; sekein the sense of moistening; tu
end of a meaning; sicatiic[a] karae (6U, muc-di); rdr-karotirdra +
abhta-tad-bhve vi + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; caand;
tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; dvayamthe two verbs; varativ[u]
secane (1P); rdrayatinma-dhtu of rdra + tat karoti []i; apialso; katek[]
secane (1A).
2.4.8
unatti kledayati ca knopayaty
ukatti ca
rdr-bhavaty rdra-bhve klidyati
stimyatti ca
unattiund[] kledane (7P); kledayaticausative of klid[] rdr-bhve (4P); caand;
knopayati nipta of the causative of kny[i] abde unde ca (1A), by 571; ukati
uk[a] secane (1P); itithus; caand; rdr-bhavatirdra + abhta-tad-bhve vi +
bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; rdra-bhvein the sense of being
wet; klidyatiklid[] rdr-bhve (4P); stimyatiim[a] rdr-bhve (4P); itithus;
caand.
2.4.9
vardhate vardhayaty atra bhayaty
edhayaty api

vardhatevdh[u] vddhau (1A); vardhayaticausative of vdh[u] vddhau (1A); atra

in this regard; bhayaticausative of bh[i] vddhau (1P); edhayaticausative of
edh[a] vddhau (2A); apialso; sacayein the sense of becoming accumulated;
sambibhartisam + [u]bh[] dhraa- poaayo (3U), by 536; itithus; sacinoti
sam + ci[] cayane (5U); tmanein the tmanepada; trayamthe three verbs.

2.4.10
tathaivopacinoty atra sambhayata
ity api
r-ktau pujayati kayaty atra
tath evain that way only; upacinotiupa + ci[] cayane (5U); atrain this regard;
sambhayatenma-dhtu of sam + bha + []i[], by Bhat 892; itithus; api
also; r- ktauin the sense of piling up; pujayatinma-dhtu of puja + tat karoti
[]i; kayati nma- dhtu of ka + tat karoti []i; atrain this regard; yugmakam
the pair of verbs.
2.4.11
uccinoti ilaty uche trayam
uchayatty api avahantti
vaituya-karae kaayaty api
uccinotiud + ci[] cayane (5U); ilatiil[a] ucche (6P); uchein the sense of gleaning
(gathering grain after reaping); trayamthe three verbs; uchayaticausative of uch[i]
uche (1P); itithus; apialso; avahantiava + han[a] his-gatyo (2P); itithus;
vaituya-karaein regards to doing husking; kaayaticausative of ka[i]
tupakarae (1A); apialso.
2.4.12
phal-karoty vitu-karotty tmane
dvayam parpunty tmane pi
prasphoayati tat-sam
phal-karotiphala + abhta-tad-bhve vi + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276, 1277,
and 612;
vitu-karotivitua + abhta-tad-bhve vi + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 776, 1276, 1277,
and 612; iti thus; tmanein the tmanepada; dvayamthe two verbs; parpunti
par + p[] pavane (9U, pv- di); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; prasphoayati
pra + sphu[a] bhedane (10P); tat-sam other verbs which have the same meaning.
2.4.13
mimte myate mne tatra mtty
akarmakam tolayaty atra hemdi-
mne tulayatty api
mimtem[] mne (3A); myatem[] mne (4A); mnein the sense of weighing,
measuring; tatrain that regard; mtim mne (2P); itithus; akarmakamwithout
a karma; tolayatitul[a] unmne (10P); atrain this regard; hema-di-mnein the
sense of weighing gold and so on; tulayatinma-dhtu of tul + tat karoti []i; iti
thus; apialso.
2.4.14
paate dvyati tathtmane
vyavaharaty ada
vyavahre pamayate
paatepa[a] vyavahre stutau ca (1A); dvyatidiv[u] kr-vijig-vyavahra-
dyuti-stuti-knti- gatiu (4P); tathin that way; tmanein the tmanepada;
vyavaharativi + ava + h[] harae (1U); adathe verb; vyavahrein the sense of
barter, commerce; apamayateapa + me[] pratidne (1A); parivartayaticausative
of pari + vt[u] varae (4A); itithus; apialso.
2.4.15
vikrte nimayate vakrte ca
vikraye
saty-karoty tmane pi tulyau
vikrtevi + [u]kr[] dravya-vinimaye (9U); nimayateni + me[] pratidne (1A);
avakrte ava + [u]kr[] dravya-vinimaye (9U); caand; vikrayein the sense of
selling; saty-karotisatya
+ [c] + [u]k[] karae (8U), by Bhat 3172; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;
tulyauare synonymous; satypayatisatya + []i (tat karoti []i), by Bhat 901; api
2.4.16
krte vinimayate krtti kraye
tisra
syn naipuye nipuati niti
krte u]kr[] dravya-vinimaye (9U); vinimayatevi + ni + me[] pratidne
(1A); krti [u]kr[] dravya-vinimaye (9U); itithus; krayein the sense of
buying; tisrathree; sytis; naipuyein the sense of being clever, skillful;
nipuatini + pu[a] ubhe karmai (6P); niti ni + auce (2P); dakate
dak[a] ghrrthe (1A); caand; atrain this regard.
2.4.17
arjane rjaty arjayati gaane
gaayaty api kalayaty api sakhyti
guane guayaty api
arjanein the sense of earning; arjatiarj[a] arjane (1P); arjayatiarj[a] pratiyatne
(10P); gaane in the sense of counting; gaayatigaa sakhyne (10P); apialso;
kalayatikala gatau sakhyne (10P); apialso; sakhytisam + khy prakathane
(2P); guanein the sense of multiplying, calculating; guayatinma-dhtu of gua
+ []i; apialso.
2.4.18
hantti dvaya proche prochaty
utsrayaty api
tad-bhede lumpate lumpaty atra mrjati
hanti[] + han[a] his-gatyo (2P); itithus; dvayamthe two verbs; prochein
the sense of throwing away, sorting out; prochatipra + uch[i] uche (1P); utsrayati
causative of ud + s gatau (1P, and 3P); apialso; tat-bhedein the sense of a
particular kind of throwing away; lumpate lup[] chedane (6U, muc-di); lumpati
lup[] chedane (6U, muc-di); atrain this regard; mrjati mj[] auce (10P); ca
and; trayamthe three verbs.
2.4.19
vibhge vaayaty atra vibhajaty tmane
py ada vibhjayaty aayati vaaty api
ca pacakam
vibhgein the sense of dividing; vaayativa[i] vibhajane (10P); atrain this
regard; vibhajati vi + bhaj[a] sevym (1U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;
adathe verb; vibhjayativi +
bhaj[a] virane (10P); aayatiasa samghte (10P); vaativa[i] vibhajane
(1P); apialso; caand; pacakamthe five verbs.

2.4.20
tiraskaroty apidadhty atra
vyavadadhty api vidadhty votti

tiraskarotitiras + [u]k[] karae (8U); apidadhtiapi + [u]dh[] dhraa-

poaayo (3U); atrain this regard; vyavadadhtivi + ava + [u]dh[]
dhraa-poaayo (3U); apialso; vidadhtivi + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo
(3U); voti[] + v[] varae (5U); itithus; savotisam + v[] varae
(5U); stotist[] cchdane (5U). ca
2.4.21
sttty tmane py aau tath
sagopayaty api apavrayati chdayati

sttist[] cchdane (9U, pv-di); itithus; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso;

aauthe eight verbs; tathin that way; sagopayaticausative of sam + gup[]
rakae (1P); apialso; apavrayatiapa + v[] varae (10U); chdayati chad[a]
savarae (10P); sthagayaticausative of hag[e] savarae (1P, gha-di); itithus;
apialso.
2.4.22
tirayaty vtau ctha nikepe
nikipaty api nikipyaty tmane pi dvau
tathopanidadhti ca
tirayatinma-dhtu of tiras + tat karoti []i; vtauin the sense of covering,
concealing; caand; athastart of a meaning; nikepein the sense of putting down,
placing; nikipatini + kip[a] prerae (6U); apialso; nikipyatini + kip[a] prerae
(4P); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; dvauthe two verbs; tathin that way;
upanidadhtiupa + ni + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); caand.

2.4.23
nyasyati pratidatte tha nikray-
kurute tath syt pratyupakaroty atra
nir-bhavatti ca
91
nyasyatini + as[u] kepae (4P); pratidatteprati + [u]d[] dne (3U) ; atha
start of a meaning; nikray-kurutenikraya + abhta-tad-bhve vi + [u]k[]
karae (8U), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; tathin that way; sytis; pratyupakaroti
prati + upa + [u]k[] karae (8U); atrain this regard; nir-bhavatinira +
abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh sattym (1P), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; itithus; ca
and.
2.4.24
pratyarpayati tu nysrpae
nirytayaty api apekate

pratyarpayatiprati + nipta of the causative of gatau prpae ca (1P), by 571; tu

end of a meaning; nysa-arpaein the sense of returning a loan; nirytayatinir +
yat[a] nikropaskrayo (nira ca pratidne) (10P); apialso; apekateapa + k[a]
darane (1A); abhyarthayateabhi + artha upaycym (10A); vanutevan[u] ycane
(8A); ardatiard[a] gatau ycane ca (1P); nthatinth[] ycopatpaivarysu
(1A), parapada by Bhat 1124.
2.4.2
5
91
Although pratidatte is followed by the word atha, pratidatte is included in the category of
nysrpae. In this regard,
ycy bhikate mrgayate ycati
ycate mrgaty anvicchati

ycymin the sense of begging; bhikatebhik[a] ycym (1A);

mrgayatemrg[a] anveae (10U, yuj-di); ycati[u]yc[] ycym
(1U); ycate[u]yc[] ycym (1U); mrgatimrg[a] anveae (10U,
yuj-di); anvicchatianu + i[u] icchym (6P), by 399; gaveayatigavea
mrgae (10P); anviyatianu + i[a] gatau (4P); itithus; caand.
2.4.26
anveate mrgayati vicinoty tmane
py ada
anveae mgayate mgyatti nava
anveateanu + e[] gatau (1A); mrgayatimrg[a] anveae (10U, yuj-di);
vicinotivi + ci[] cayane (5U); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; adathe
verb; anveaein the sense of seeking, searching; mgayatemga anveae
(10A); mgyatimg[a] anveae (4P); itithus; navanine; kriyverbs.

2.4.27
dohnuklye dugdhe gau prasnute ca
svaya-srave
dogdhi dugdhe trayam ida praprayati
doha-nuklyein the sense of conformity in regards to milking; dugdheduh[a]
praprae (2U); gaucow; prasnutepra + u prasravae (2P); caand; svayam-
sravein the sense of flowing by itself; dogdhiduh[a] praprae (2U); dugdheduh[a]
praprae (2U); trayamgroup of three; idamthis; praprayatipra + pr[]
pyyne (10P); dohanein the sense of milking.
2.4.28
stave tu stauty atho yauti viprayukte
viyauti ca viyojayati vileayati ctra
viyojane
stavein the sense of praising; tuend of a meaning; stautiu[] stutau (2U); atho
start of a meaning; yautiyu miramiraayo (2P); viprayuktevi + pra + yuj[ir]
yoge (7U); viyautivi + yu miramiraayo (2P); caand; viyojayativi + yuj[a]
sayamane (10P); vileayativi + li[a] leae (10P); caand; atrain this
regard; viyojanein the sense of detaching, separating.
2.4.29
viyujyate vighaate tath viliyatti ca
vicchidyate dvaya karma-kartari
vyatiricyate
viyujyatevi + yuj[a] samdhau (4A); vighaatevi + gha[a] ceym (1A); tath
in that way; viliyativi + li[a] ligane (4P); itithus; caand; vicchidyatevi +
chid[ir] dvidh-karae (7U); dvayamthe two verbs; karma-kartarikarma-kartari
prayoga (see 639); vyatiricyatevi + ati + ric[a] viyojana-sampacanayo (10P, yuj-
di).
2.4.30
mirae mirayaty atra tath
sayojayaty api rayaty atra
sammelayati churayatty api
miraein the sense of mixing; mirayatimira samparke (10P); atrain this
regard; tathin that way; sayojayatisam + yuj[a] sayamane (10P); apialso;
rayaticausative of r[a] bhym (1P); atrain this regard; sammelayati
causative of sam + mil[a] sage (6P); churayati causative of chur[a] chedane (6P); iti
thus; apialso.
2.4.3
1
sayunakti ca sapttra kriy
saghaayaty api sayujyate tu sayauti

sayunaktisam + yuj[ir] yoge (7U); caand; saptaseven; atrain this regard;

kriyverbs; saghaayatisam + gha[a] saghte (10P, gha-di); apialso;
sayujyatesam + yuj[a] samdhau (4A); tuend of a meaning; sayautisam +
yu miramiraayo (2P); sampaktipc[] samparke (7P); tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; caand.
2.4.32
sambhidyate karma-kartary atra
sasjatty api sambandhnti milaty atra
sagacchati ca sagatau
sambhidyatesam + bhid[ir] vidrae; karma-kartariin karma-kartari prayoga (639);
atrain this regard; sasjatisam + sj[a] visarge (6P); itithus; apialso;
sambandhntisam + bandh[a] bandhane (9P); milati mil[a] sage (6P); atrain this
regard; sagacchatisam + gam[] gatau (1P); caand; sagatauin the sense of
coming together, combining, meeting.
2.4.33
vin karmtmane ctra tath
sannipataty api upasdaty upanamaty
atra syd upakahate
vinwithout; karmakarma; tmanein the tmanepada; caand; atrain this
regard; tathin that way; sannipatatisam + ni + pat[] gatau (1P); apialso;
upasdatiupa + ad[] viaraa-gaty- avasdaneu (1P, and 6P), by 419; upanamati
upa + am[a] prahvatve abde ca (1P); atrain this regard; sytis; upakahate
upa + kah[i] oke (1A).
2.4.34
tad-bhede samavaitti sacate
csajaty api vyatiajyata ity etat

tat-bhedein the sense of a particular kind of collecting, meeting; samavaitisam +

ava + i[] gatau (2P); itithus; sacateac[a] samavye (1A); caand; sajati[] +
anj[a] sage (1P); apialso; vyatiajyatevi + ati + anj[a] sage (1P); itithus; etat
this; padamverb; sytis; karma- kartarikarma-kartari prayoga (639).

2.4.35
utphaaty ucchalati ca tathodricyata
ity api utsicyate tathotseke dvitaya
karma-kartari
utphaatiud + pha[a] gatau (1P); ucchalatiud + al[a] gatau (1P); caand; tath
in that way; udricyateud + ric[ir] virecane (7U); itithus; apithus; utsicyateud
+ ic[a] karae (6U); tathin that way; utsekein the sense of overflowing,
foaming over; dvitayamthe two verbs; karma-kartariin karma-kartari prayoga
(639).
2.4.36
utkepae tnnayati tathotkipati
ctmane udasyaty uddharati ca catvry
uttambhayaty api
utkepaein the sense of raising, erecting; tuend of a meaning; unnayatiud +
[] prpae (1U); tathin that way; utkipatiud + kip[a] prerae (6U); caand;
tmanein the tmanepada; udasyatiud + as[u] kepae (4P); uddharatiud +
dh[] dhrae (1U); caand; catvrifour; uttambhayaticausative of ud + stanbh[u]
rodhane (sautra-dhtu by Bhat vtti 917), by 421; api also.
2.4.37
ntv nayaty etv haraty api
ctmane sammrjayati sammri
tath parisamhati
ntauin the sense of bringing; nayati[] + [] prpae (1U); etauthe two
verbs; harati [] + h[] harae (haraa dentara-prpaam) (1U); apialso; ca
and; tmanein the tmanepada; sammrjayatisam + mj[] auce (10P, yuj-di);
sammrisam + mj[] auce (10P, yuj-di); tathin that way; parisamhatipari
+ sam + h[a] vitarke (1A), by Bhat 1136.
2.4.38
tmane pi ca sammrje upadegdhy
upalimpati tmane pi pada-dvandva
gomayaty upalepane
tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; caand; sammrjein the sense of
cleansing, brushing, wiping; upadegdhiupa + dih[a] pralepe (2U); upalimpatiupa
+ lip[a] upadehe (6U, muc-di); tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; pada-
dvandvamboth words; gomayatigoma upalepane (10P); upalepanein the sense
of besmearing.
2.4.39
sandpane jvalayati tath
sandpayaty api uddyotayati

sandpanein the sense of kindling, inflaming; jvalayaticausative of jval[a] dptau (1P,

gha-di v); tathin that way; sandpayaticausative of sam + dp[] dptau (4A);
apialso; uddyotayati causative of ud + dyut[a] dptau (1A); sandhukayati
causative of sam + dhuk[a] sandpana-jvana- kleaneu (1A); caand; jvlayati
causative of jval[a] dptau (1P, gha-di v); apialso.
2.4.40
pke tu randhayaty atra pacatty tmane
py ubhe adhirayati ca rti rapayaty api
radhyati
pkein the sense of cooking, baking, frying, roasting, broiling, boiling, ripening,
growing; tuend of a meaning; randhayaticausative of radh[a] sarddhau
hisy ca (4P), by Bhat 583; atra in this regard; pacati[u]pac[a] pke (1U);
itithus; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; ubhethe two verbs; adhirayati
causative of adhi + r[] pke (9U); caand; rtir pke (2P); rapayati
causative of rai pke (1P) or r pke (2P), by 571; apialso; radhyatiradh[a]
sarddhau hisy ca (4P).
2.4.41
radhyate pacyate karma-kartke tra ca
rdhyati bharjate pka-bhede syt
traya bhjjati bhjjate
radhyateradh[a] sarddhau hisy ca (4P); pacyate[u]pac[a] pke (1U);
karma-kartke when karma-kartari prayoga is used (639); atrain this regard; ca
and; rdhyatirdh[a] sasiddhau (4P); bharjatebhj[] bharjane (1A); pka-bhede
in the sense of a particular kind of cooking; sytis; trayamthe three verbs;
bhjjatibhrasj[a] pke (6U); bhjjatebhrasj[a] pke (6U) (sakaraa by 473).

2.4.42
l-karoty tmane pi la-pke pada
matam
drav-ktau lnayati layati drvayaty
l-karotila + [c] + [u]k[] karae (8U), by Bhat 3171; tmanein the
tmanepada; api
also; la-pkein the sense of roasting on a spit; padamthe verb; matam
ktauin the sense of making liquid; lnayaticausative of l leae (9P) or l[]
leae (4A), by
Bhat 797; layatil drav-karae (10P, yuj-di); drvayaticausative of dru gatau
2.4.43
llayaty api v lyayati lpayatty api
sandadhty tmane cbhiaoty
abhiave dvayam
llayaticausative of l dne (2P), by Bhat 797; apialso; vor; lyayaticausative
of l leae (9P) or l[] leae (4A), by Bhat 797; lpayaticausative of l dne
(2P) by 571, or causative of l leae (9P) by 314, 412, and 571, or causative of l[]
leae (4A) by 314, 412, and 571; itithus; apialso; sandadhtisam + [u]dh[]
dhraa-poaayo (3U); tmanein the tmanepada; caand; abhiaotiabhi +
a[u] dne (8U); abhiavein the sense of pressing out, distilling, fermenting;
dvayamthe two verbs.
2.4.44
svadate rocate rucy sasktau
saskaroty ada tmane pratiyatne tu
syd upaskurute dvayam
svadatevad[a] svdane (1A); rocateruc[a] dptv abhiprtau (1A); rucym
in the sense of pleasure; sasktauin the sense of making ready, preparing;
saskarotisam + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 558; adathe verb; tmanein the
tmanepada; pratiyatnein the sense of making an effort; tuend of a meaning;
syyis; upaskuruteupa + [u]k[] karae (8U), by 558; dvayam the two
verbs.
iti vaiya-ce-
varga
itithus ends; vaiya-ce-vargathe section on the specific
activities of vaiyas.

Now we begin the section on the specific activities of

vaiyas.
2.4.1
Karae
Kati, kate, karati, radati, vilikhati, khanati, khanate, halati, and halate
mean to plough.
2.4.2
Upta-kau
Bj-karoti and bj-kurute mean to plough after
sowing.
2.4.2
Dvi-kau
Dvity-karoti, dvity-kurute, amb-karoti, amb-kurute, dvi-gu-karoti, and
dvi-gu-kurute

2.4.3
Tri-kau
Tty-karoti, tty-kurute, tri-gu-karoti, and tri-gu-kurute, mean to
plough thrice.
2.4.4
Saghe
loayati and saghate mean to mix (the
soil).
2.4.4
Hali-
grahe
Halayati means to use a large
plow.
2.4.5
Uptau
Vapati, prakirati, and vapate mean to
sow.
2.4.5
Ropae
Mlayati, sarohayati, and saropayati mean to grow
(transitive).
2.4.6
Sthiratym
92
Dhravati, dhruvati , mlati, and pratitihati mean to
be firm.
2.4.6
oe
uyati, uhati, yyate, and vyati mean
to wither.
2.4.7
Seke
Sicati, sicate, rdr-karoti, rdr-kurute, varati, rdrayati, kate, unatti, kledayati,
knopayati, ukati,
mean to sprinkle, water.
2.4.8
rdra-bhve
rdr-bhavati, klidyati, and stimyati mean to be
moist.
Vardhate, vardhayati, bhayati, and edhayati mean to increase
(transitive).
2.4.9
Sacaye
Sambibharti, sambibhte, sacinoti, sacinute, upacinoti, upacinute, and
sambhayate mean to accumulate, heap up (intransitive).

2.4.10
R-ktau
Pujayati and kayati mean to heap up, pile up
(transitive).
2.4.11
Uche
Uccinoti, ilati, and uchayati mean to
glean.
2.4.11
Vaituya-karae
Avahanti, kaayati, phal-karoti, phal-kurute, vitu-karoti, vitu-kurute,
parpunti, parpunte, prasphoayati, and other similar verbs mean to thresh.

2.4.13
Mne
Mimte, myate, mti, and tolayati mean to weigh,
measure.
92
One version of Prayuktkhyta-majar reads sthiraty dhravaty atra, but according to another
manuscript, found in the Rdh-Govinda temple in Jaipur, the reading is sthiraty dhruvaty atra.
There are two dhtus dhru: dhru sthairye (1P) and dhru gati-sthairyayo (6P).
 93
In this regard, mti does not take a karma.

2.4.13
Hemdi-mne
Tolayati and tulayati mean to weigh (in regard to gold
and so on).
2.4.14
Vyavahre
Paate, dvyati, vyavaharati, vyavaharate, apamayate, and parivartayati mean to do
94
business, barter, bet.

2.4.15
Vikraye
Vikrte, nimayate, and avakrte mean
to sell.
Saty-karoti, saty-kurute, and satypayati mean to settle
the price.
2.4.16
Kraye
Krte, vinimayate, and krti mean
to buy.
2.4.16
Naipuye
Nipuati, niti, and dakate mean to be
clever.
2.4.17
Arjane
Arjati and arjayati mean to
earn.
2.4.17
Gaane
Gaayati, kalayati, and sakhyti mean to
count.
2.4.17
Guane
Guayati and hanti mean to multiply,
calculate.
2.4.18
Proche
Prochati and utsrayati mean to throw away,
sort out.
2.4.18
Tad-bhede
Lumpate, lumpati, and mrjati mean to throw away, clean out (in a
certain way).
2.4.19
Vibhge
Vaayati, vibhajati, vibhajate, vibhjayati, aayati, and vaati mean
to divide.
2.4.22
vt
au
93
This is confirmed by Mdhavy dhtu-vtti.
94
Vyavahra is of two kinds: dyta-viayaka-paa-rpa (betting in a game of dice) and kraya-
vikraytmaka-dravya- vinimaya-rpa (exchange of goods based on buying and selling) (Bhat
Amta 973).
 95
Tiraskaroti, tiraskurute, apidadhti, apidhatte , vyavadadhti, vyavadhatte,
vidadhti, vidhatte, voti, vute, savoti, savute, stoti, stute,
stti, stte, sagopayati, apavrayati, chdayati, sthagayati, and tirayati
mean to cover, conceal.
2.4.22
Nikepe
Nikipati, nikipate, nikipyati, nikipyate, upanidadhti, upanidhatte, and nyasyati
mean to put down, place.

2.4.23
Nysrpae
Pratidatte, nikray-kurute, nikray-karoti, pratyupakaroti, pratyupakurute,
nir-bhavati, and

2.4.24
Ycym
Nirytayati, apekate, abhyarthayate, vanute, ardati, nthati, bhikate, mrgayate,
ycati, and ycate

2.4.26
Anveae
Mrgati, anvicchati, gaveayati, anviyati, anveate, mrgayati, vicinoti, vicinute,
mgayate, and mgyati

2.4.27
Dohnuklye
Dugdhe means to give milk (in regard to a cows being inclined to give milk rather
than having to tie her up).

2.4.27
Svaya-srave
Prasnute means to emit fluid by itself. For example, gau prasnute means The cow
emits milk by itself.

2.4.27
Dohane
Dogdhi, dugdhe, and praprayati mean to milk,
extract.
2.4.28
Stave
Stauti means to
praise.
2.4.28
Viyojane
Yauti, viprayukte, viyauti, viyojayati, vileayati, viyujyate, vighaate, viliyati, as
well as the verbs

2.4.30
Mirae
Mirayati, sayojayati, rayati, sammelayati, churayati, sayunakti, and saghaayati
mean to mix.
95
Optional forms of apidadhti and apidhatte such as pidadhti and pidhatte are implied because the
a of api is optionally deleted when [u]dh[] follows: aper di-haro dh-naddhayor v (531). In this
regard, khyta-candrik (2.4.28) has the reading tirodadhty apidadhty antardhau pidadhti ca.
2.4.32
Sagatau
Sayujyate, sayauti, sampakti, sampkte, sasjati, sambandhnti, milati,
sagacchati, as well as
sambhidyate in karma-kartari prayoga, mean to come toghether, combine, meet.
96
Sagacchate , sannipatati, upasdati, upanamati, and upakahate are also used when

2.4.34
Tad-bhede
Samavaiti, sacate, sajati, as well as vyatiajyate in karma-kartari prayoga, mean
to inhere, be mutually connected.

2.4.35
Utseke
Utphaati, ucchalati, as well as udricyate and utsicyate in karma-kartari prayoga, mean
to overflow.
2.4.36
Utkepae
Unnayati, utkipati, utkpate, udasyati, uddharati, and uttambhayati mean to
raise, erect.
2.4.37
ntau
nayati, nayate, harati, and harate mean to
bring, fetch.
2.4.38
Sammrje
Sammrjayati, sammri, and parisamhati mean to cleanse,
brush, wipe.
2.4.38
Upalepane
Upadegdhi, upadigdhe, upalimpati, upalimpate, and gomayati means to smear
(especially with cow- dung).

2.4.39
Sandpane
Jvalayati, sandpayati, uddyotayati, sandhukayati, and jvlayati mean to ignite,
kindle, inflame.
2.4.40
Pke
Randhayati, randhayate, pacati, pacate, adhirayati, rti, rapayati, radhyati,
rdhyati, as well as

2.4.41
Pka-bhede
Bharjate, bhjjati, and bhjjate mean to fry,
roast.
2.4.42
la-pke
l-karoti and l-kurute mean to roast on
a spit.
2.4.42
Drav-
ktau
96
This is mentioned in the stra sama pcchati-gam-cchi-sv-rubhyo vettitas tath do rte
ckarmakatve (Bhat 1132).
 97
Lnayati , layati, drvayati, llayati, lyayati, and lpayati mean to
melt, liquify,

2.4.43
Abhiave
Sandadhti, sandhatte, abhiaoti, and abhiaute mean to extract,
2.4.44
Rucym
Svadate and rocate mean to
please.
2.4.44
Sasktau
Saskaroti and saskurute mean to adorn or to dress
98
food.
2.4.44
Pratiyatne
Upaskaroti and upaskurute mean to
99
enhance.
Here ends the section on the specific activities of
vaiyas.

dra-ce-
varga
2.5.1
vayate vayati vytv yate tha
vivyati tath nivyati sytau
parivyati svyati
vayateve[] tantu-santne (1U); vayative[] tantu-santne (1U); vytauin the sense
of weaving; yatey[] tantu-santne (1A); athastart of a meaning; vivyativi +
iv[u] tantu-santne (4P), by 192; tathin that way; nivyatini + iv[u] tantu-
santne (4P), by 192; sytauin the sense of sewing, stitching; parivyatipari +
iv[u] tantu-santne (4P), by 192; svyatiiv[u] tantu-santne (4P), by 192.

2.5.2
takati yati takoti kyati
kraayaty api
takae tvakati tath
takatitak[a] tvacane (tvacana savaraam) (1P); yatio tan-karae (4P), by
538; takoti tak[] tan-karae (5P); kyatik[a] tan-karae (4P); kraayati
nma-dhtu of ka + []i, by 615; apialso; takaein the sense of cutting, peeling;
tvakatitvak[] tan-karae (1P); tath in that way; parivsayaticausative of
pari + vas[a] cchdane (2A); itithus; apialso.
2.5.3
ullekhe ullikhaty ekam utkrau
ttkiraty ada sakute taikya-
karae kauti cottejayaty api

97
When []i follows, l and l[] are optionally replaced by ln provided the sense is melting fat: liyo
ln lter ll v au sneha-drvae (Bhat 797).
98
S[u] is applied after sam + [u]k[] when the meaning is bhaa (decoration) or samavya
(coming together, assembling) (559). For instance, saskta bhakyam (The food is prepared),
tanu saskaroti, alakarotty artha
(He decorates his body) (Commentary 559). Also, see tatra saskta bhakya cet (Bhat 2421).
99
For example, yamun-jalam upaskurute, su-vsayatty artha (He enhances the Yamun water,
which means He adds fragrance to the Yamun water) (Commentary 560).
ullekhein the sense of making lines, delineating, chiseling; ullikhatiud + likh[a]
vilekhane (6P); ekamone; utkrauin the sense of digging up, carving; tuend of a
meaning; utkiratiud + k vikepe (6P); adathe verb; sakutesam + ku
tejane (2P), tmapada by Bhat 1165; taikya- karaein the sense of making sharp;
kautiku tejane (2P); caand; uttejayatiud + tij[a] nine (10P); apialso.

2.5.4
niinoti nisaty tmane pi pada-
dvayam
chedane kntati chinte chinatti
niinotini + i[] nine (5U); nisatisvrtha-san-anta of ni + n[a] tejane
(1U), by 456; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; pada-dvayamthe two verbs;
chedanein the sense of cutting; kntatikt[] chedane (6P, muc-di); chinte
chid[ir] dvidh-karae (7U), by 78; chinatti chid[ir] dvidh-karae (7U); chedayati
causative of chid[ir] dvidh-karae (7U); apialso.
2.5.5
chyati vardhayatty atra vcatty atha
tad-bhidi coayaty atra cuati chuati
choayaty api
chyaticho chedane (4P), by 538; vardhayativardh[a] chedana-praayo (10P); iti
thus; atrain this regard; vcati[o]vrac[] chedane (6P), by 473; itithus; atha
start of a meaning; tad-bhidi in the sense of a particular method of cutting; coayati
cu[a] chedane (10U); atrain this regard; cuaticu[a] chedane (6P); chuati
chu[a] chedane (6P); choayaticausative of chu[a] chedane (6P); apialso.

2.5.6
pryo lunte dhnyde chede dti
lunty api truati truyati cchede
chidyate karma-kartke
pryagenerally; luntel[] chedane (9U, pv-di); dhnya-deof grains and so
on; chedein the sense of cutting, harvesting; dtid[p] lavane (2P); luntil[]
chedane (9U, pv-di); api also; truatitru[a] chedane (6P); truyatitru[a]
chedane (4P); chedein the sense of cutting off; chidyatechid[ir] dvidh-karae (7U);
karma-kartkeused in karma-kartari prayoga (639).
2.5.7
bhinte vidrayati ca bhinatti ca
vidrae khaayaty api
sphoayati bhedayaty dyati
bhintebhid[ir] vidrae (7U), by 78; vidrayaticausative of vi + d vidrae (9P);
caand; bhinattibhid[ir] vidrae (7U); caand; vidraein the sense of breaking,
bursting; khaayati[] + kha[i] chedane (10U); apialso; sphoayaticausative
of sphu[ir] visarae (visaraam vika, viaraa iti phe vidraam) (1P);
bhedayaticausative of bhid[ir] vidrae (7U); dyatido avakhaane (4P), by 538.

2.5.8
parkate nikaate uddhatdi-
viniraye
ploati pluyati dahaty oati
100
parkatepari + k[a] darane (1A); nikaateni + ka[a] hisym (1P) ;
uddhat-di- vinirayein the sense of ascertaining purity and so on; ploatiplu[u]
dhe (1P); pluyatiplu[a] dhe (4P); dahatidah[a] bhasm-karae (1P); oati
u[a] dhe (1P); jvalayaticausative of jval[a] dptau (1P, gha-di v); apialso.

100
Rpa Gosvm says the dhtu ka[a] hisym (1P) is ubhayapad.
See verse 2.3.76.
2.5.9
muti corayaty atra luhayaty api
moae
tmane cpaharati glocaty atra ca
mutimu[a] steye (9P); corayaticur[a] steye (10P); atrain this regard;
luhayatiluh[a] steye (10P); apialso; moaein the sense of stealing,
robbing; tmanein the tmanepada; ca and; apaharatiapa + h[] harae (1U);
glocatigluc[u] steya-karae (1P); atrain this regard; caand; luhatilu[i] steye
(1P).
2.5.10
ulluhaty cchinattti dvayam etad
bald-dhtau
prasahaty tmane py atra hahatti
101
ulluhatiud + luh[i] steye (1P) ; cchinatti[] + chid[ir] dvidh-karae (7U); iti
thus; dvayampair of verbs; etatthis; balt-htauin the sense of taking away by
force; prasahatipra + ah[a] marae (10P, yuj-di); tmanein the tmanepada (pra
+ ah[a] marae (1A)); apialso; atrain this regard; hahatihah[a] balt kre
(1P); itithus; balt-ktauin the sense of doing violence.

2.5.11
nikuti tu nikare tath
nikaratty api
syn nikul-karoty etad tmane tra tu
nikutinir + ku[a] nikare (nikaro nikanam) (9P); tuend of a meaning;
nikarein the sense of extracting, husking; tathin that way; nikaratinir +
k[a] vilekhane karae ca (1P); itithus; apialso; sytis; nikul-karotinikula
+ [c] + [u]k[] karae (8U), by Bhat 3168; etatthe verb; tmanein the
tmanepada; atrain this regard; tuend of a meaning; sa-vyathein the sense of
feeling excessing pain.
2.5.12
dve nipatr-sapatrbhy karoti
kurute pade lakayaty akayaty atra
lchatti ca lakae
dvethe two verbs; nipatr-sapatrbhymafter nipatr and sapatr, by Bhat
3167; karoti [u]k[] karae (8U); kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); padethe two
verbs; lakayatilak[a] darankayo (10P); akayatiaka lakae (10P); atrain
this regard; lchatilch[i] lakae (1P); itithus; caand; lakaein the sense of
marking.
2.5.13
sandnayati badhnti tath sandyati
klati nahyatty tmane tri
sayacchati sinoti ca
sandnayaticausative of sam + dn[a] avakhaane (1U); badhntibandh[a]
bandhane (9P); tathin that way; sandyatisam + do avakhaane (4P), by 538;
klatikl[a] bandhane (1P); nahyatiah[a] bandhane (4U); itithus; tmanein
the tmanepada; trithe three verbs; sayacchatisam + yam[u] uparame (1P),
by 399; sinotii[] bandhane (5U); caand.
2.5.14
payaty api bandhe tha vipayati
mocane
vimocayaty atha stambhe stambhate
payatipa[a] bandhane (10P), or nma-dhtu of pa + tat karoti []i, by
Bhat 897; apialso; bandhein the sense of binding; athastart of a meaning;
vipayativi + pa[a] bandhane (10P),
101
The dhtu luh[i] steye (1P) can be found in Mdhavy
dhtu-vtti.
or nma-dhtu of vi + pa + tat karoti []i, by Bhat 897; mocanein the sense of
releasing; vimocayativi + muc[a] pramocane (10P); athastart of a meaning;
stambhein the sense of supporting; stambhateabh[i] pratibandhe (1A);
skambhateskabh[i] pratibandhe (1A); tathin that way.

2.5.15
atha stabdh-ktau stambhayati
vikambhayatty api pratibadhnti ca tath
vighne pratyarthayaty ada
athastart of a meaning; stabdh-ktauin the sense of making firmly fixed;
stambhayaticausative of abh[i] pratibandhe (1A); vikambhayaticausative of vi
+ skabh[i] pratibandhe (1A); itithus; apialso; pratibadhntiprati + bandh[a]
bandhane (9P); caand; tathin that way; vighnein the sense of impeding;
pratyarthayatiprati + artha upaycym (10A); adathe verb.
2.5.16
tath vihanty antareti pratyhaty
tmane pi ca vighnayaty antarayati
pratyavaiti tu duyati
tathin that way; vihantivi + han[a] his-gatyo (2P); antaretiantar + i[] gatau
(2P); pratyhatiprati + h[a] vitarke (1A), by Bhat 1135; tmanein the
tmanepada; apialso; ca and; vighnayatinma-dhtu of vighna + tat karoti []i;
antarayatinma-dhtu of antara + tat karoti []i; pratyavaitiprati + ava + i[] gatau
(2P); tuend of a meaning; duyatidu[a] vaiktye (vaiktya uddhy-abhva) (4P).

2.5.17
dukaroty aghayaty atra dukte
pakayaty api
santatau santanotti tath santanute
pi ca atra satrayate santnayatti
dukarotidur + [u]k[] karae (8U); aghayatiagha ppa-karae (10P); atrain this
regard; duktein the sense of a wicked deed, a sin; pakayatinma-dhtu of paka+
tat karoti []i; api also; santatauin the sense of continuing, extending; santanoti
sam + tan[u] vistre (8U); itithus; tathin that way; santanutesam + tan[u]
vistre (8U); apialso; caand; atrain this regard; satrayatesatra santati-kriyym
(10A); santnayaticausative of sam + tan[u] vistre (8U); iti thus; catuayamthe
four verbs.
iti dra-kriy-
varga
itithus ends; dra-kriy-vargathe section on the specific activities
of dras.
iti prayuktkhyta-majary dvitya
ka
itithus ends; prayuktkhyta-majarymin Prayuktkhyta-majar; dvitya
second; ka
chapter.

Now we begin the section on the specific activities of

dras.
2.5.1
Vytau
Vayate, vayati, and yate mean to
weave.
2.5.1
Syt
au
Vivyati, nivyati, parivyati, and svyati mean to
sew, stitch.
2.5.2
Takae
Takati, yati, takoti, kyati, kraayati, tvakati, and parivsayati mean to make
thin, to cut, peel, shred.

2.5.3
Ullekhe
Ullikhati means to make lines, chisel,
engrave.
2.5.3
Utkrau
Utkirati means to dig up,
carve.
2.5.3
Taikya-karae
Sakute, kauti, uttejayati, niinoti, niinute, nisati, and nisate mean
to sharpen.
2.5.4
Chedane
Kntati, chintte, chinatti, chedayati, chyati, vardhayati, and vcati
mean to cut.
2.5.5
Tad-bhidi
Coayati, cuati, chuati, and choayati mean to cut (in a
certain way).
2.5.6
Dhnyde chede
Generally, lunte, dti, lunti, truati, and truyati mean to harvest
grains and so on.
2.5.6
Chede
Chidyate, used in karma-kartari prayoga, means to
cut off.
2.5.7
Vidrae
Bhintte, vidrayati, bhinatti, khaayati, sphoayati, and bhedayati mean to
break, burst.
2.5.8
uddhatdi-viniraye
Parkate and nikaate mean to examine, ascertain
the purity.

Ploati, pluyati, dahati, oati, and jvalayati mean to

2.5.9
Moae
Muti, corayati, luhayati, apaharati, apaharate, glocati, and luhati mean
to steal, rob.
2.5.10
Bald-dhtau
Ulluhati and cchinatti mean to take away by
force.

102
These verbs appear under the meaning dhe in khyta-
candrik (2.5.8).
2.5.10
Balt-ktau
Prasahati, prasahate, and hahati mean to use force,
violence.
2.5.11
Nikare
Nikuti, nikarati, nikul-karoti, and nikul-kurute mean to extract,
husk, shell.
2.5.11
Sa-vyathe
Nipatr-karoti, nipatr-kurute, sapatr-karoti, and sapatr-kurute mean to cause
excessive pain, wound severely (especially in regard to a hunter).

2.5.12
Lakae
Lakayati, akayati, and lchati mean to mark,
brand.
2.5.14
Bandhe
Sandnayati, badhnti, sandyati, klati, nahyati, nahyate, sayacchati, sayacchate
103
, sinoti, sinute,

2.5.14
Mocane
Vipayati and vimocayati mean to release (an
animal).
2.5.14
Stambhe
Stambhate and skambhate mean to prop,
support.
2.5.15
Stabdh-ktau
Stambhayati, vikambhayati, and pratibadhnti mean to make
stiff, firm.
2.5.15
Vighne
Pratyarthayati, vihanti, antareti, pratyhati, pratyhate, vighnayati, antarayati, mea
and pratyavaiti n

2.5.17
Dukte
Duyati, dukaroti, dukurute, aghayati, and pakayati mean to commit a wicked
deed or a sin.
2.5.17
Santatau
Santanoti, santanute, satrayate, and santnayati mean to
continue, extend.
Here ends the section on the specific activities of
dras.
Here ends the second chapter of Prayuktkhyta-
majar.

103
tmapada endings are applied after sam + yam[u] uparame (1P) by the stra sam-ud-bhyo
yamer agrantha-gaurave (Bhat 1172). This application occurs when sam + yam is sa-karmaka. For
example: mana sayacchate (He restrains the mind (from sense objects)) (Bhat vtti 1172).
 Ttya
ka
3.1.1
prakraka-san-dy-anta-nnrthkhys
ttyake akarmak ca ke smin

prakraka-san-dy-anta-nn-artha-khyknown as prakraka, san-dy-anta,

and nn-artha; ttyakein the third; akarmakakarmaka verbs; caand; ke
chapter; asminin this; vargsections; catvrafour; ritdeclared.

Prakra-
varga
3.1.2
yni prvam asagaty naivkhyta-
padni ha khytni pracakyante tni
varge tra knicit
yniwhich; prvampreviously; asagatydue to incongruity; nanot; eva
only; khyta- padniverbs; hapreviously; khytniverbs; pracakyantewill
be described; tnithey; vargein the section; atrain this; knicitsome.

3.1.3
prabhti vyucchati vyue pratyati
vibhti ca avadyati uklatve vetate
ca kriy-yugam
prabhtipra + bh dptau (2P); vyucchativi + ucch[] vivse (1P); vyuein the
sense of becoming bright (daybreak); pratyatiprati + [a] rujym (1P); vibhti
vi + bh dptau (2P); caand; avadyatiava + dai[p] odhane (1P); uklatvein the
sense of brightness; vetatevit[] vare (1A); caand; kriy-yugamthe pair of
verbs.
3.1.4
rajyati tri rajati lohityati
ctmane oatti ca raktatve
haritve harityati
rajyatiranj[a] rge (4U); trithree; rajatiranj[a] rge (1U); lohityatinma-dhtu
of lohita + [k]ya[], by Bhat 879; caand; tmanein the tmanepada; oatio[]
lauhitye (1P); itithus; caand; raktatvein the sense of being red; haritvein the
sense of being green; harityatinma- dhtu of harita + [k]ya[], by Bhat 879.

3.1.5
nlyate nlati ca tath ymyate
padam
vi-rodhe vaghti
nlyatenma-dhtu of nla + [k]ya[], by Bhat 879; nlatinma-dhtu of nla +
[k]vi[p], by 612; caand; tathin that way; ymyatenma-dhtu of yma +
[k]ya[]; padamthe verb; vi- rodhein the sense of checking rain; avaghti
ava + grah[a] updne (9U); tathin that way; avaskandatiava + skand[ir] gati-
oaayo (gatir atra skhalanam) (1P); dvayamthe two verbs.
3.1.6
sryendu-grahae tpaplavate
coparajyati utkocayati ttkoce
daridrti tu durgatau
srya-indu-grahaein the sense of a solar or a lunar eclipse; tuend of a meaning;
upaplavate upa + plu[] gatau (1A); caand; uparajyatiupa + ranj[a] rge (4U);
utkocayaticausative of ud + kuc[a] kauilye (1P); tuend of a meaning; utkocein
the sense of being corrupt, taking a bribe; daridrtidaridr durgatau (2P); tuend of
a meaning; durgatauin the sense of being poor or needy.

3.1.7
vyabhicre vyabhicaraty anyath-
bhavatty api
dur-ktau davayati viprakarayatty
vyabhicrein the sense of going astray, deviating; vyabhicarativi + abhi + car[a]
gatau (1P); anyath-bhavatianyath + bh sattym (1P); itithus; apialso; dur-
ktauin the sense of making distant; davayatinma-dhtu of dra + tat karoti []i,
by 616; viprakarayaticausative of vi + pra + k[a] vilekhane karae ca (1P); iti
thus; apialso.
3.1.8
drghayaty yamayati syd drgh-
karae dvayam
udvse tdvasaty atra tathocchann-
drghayatinma-dhtu of drgha + tat karoti []i, by 615; yamayaticausative of
[] + yam[u] uparame (1P); sytis; drgh-karaein the sense of making long;
dvayamthe two verbs; udvsein the sense of banishing or undressing; tuend of a
meaning; udvasatiud + vas[a] nivse (1P); atrain this regard; tathin that way;
ucchann-bhavatiucchanna (ud + chad + [k]ta) + abhta-tad-bhve vi + bh
sattym (1P), by 776, 1276, 1277, and 612; apialso.
3.1.9
utsdaty ujjaati ca ee tu
pariiyate atrvaiyata iti
dvitaya karma-kartari
utsdatiud + ad[] viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu (1P, and 6P), by 419; ujjaatiud +
ja[a] saghte (1P); caand; eein the sense of a remaining; tuend of a meaning;
pariiyatepari + i[] vieae (7P); atrain this regard; avaiyateava + i[]
vieae (7P); itithus; dvitayamthe two verbs; karma-kartariin karma-kartari
prayoga (639).
3.1.10
saghte piayaty atra styyaty api
samhati kayati tu katau
ghau kaati gharati
upasaharatti syt tath nigamayaty
saghtein the sense of combining, collecting; piayatipi[i] saghte (10P); atra
in this regard; styyatiyai abda-saghtayo (1P); apialso; samhatisam +
h[a] vitarke (1A), by Bhat 1136; kayatinma-dhtu of ka (kav-di) + tat
karoti []i, by 618; tuend of a meaning; katauin the sense of itching, scratching;
ghauin the sense of friction, rubbing together; kaatika[a] hisym (1P);
gharatigh[u] saghare (1P); upasaharatiupa + sam
+ h[] harae (1U); itithus; sytis; tathin that way; nigamayaticausative of ni
+ gam[] gatau (1P, gha-di); apialso.
iti prakra-
varga
itithus ends; prakra-vargathe miscellaneous
section.

Ttya
ka
In this third chapter, there are four sections, which are called: prakra, san-dy-
anta, nnrtha- dhtus, and akarmaka-dhtus.

Prakra-
varga
Whichever verbs were not mentioned previously due to incongruity shall be
mentioned in this section.

3.1.3
Vyue
Prabhti, vyucchati, pratyati, and vibhti mean to become
visible, gleam.
3.1.3
uklatve
Avadyati and vetate mean to be bright,
white.
3.1.4
Raktatve
Rajyati, rajyate, rajati, rajate, lohityati, lohityate, and oati mean to
become red.
3.1.4
Haritve
Harityati means to become
green.
Nlyate and nlati mean to become
blue.
ymyate means to become dark blue or
104
dark.
3.1.5
Vi-rodhe
Avaghti and avaskandati mean to protect oneself from
the rain.
3.1.6
Sryendu-grahae
Upaplavate and uparajyati mean to
eclipse.
3.1.6
Utkoce
Utkocayati means to be corrupt, take a
bribe.
3.1.6
Durgatau
Daridrti means to be poor,
needy.
3.1.7
Vyabhicre
Vyabhicarati and anyath-bhavati mean to deviate, be
otherwise.
3.1.7
Dur-
ktau
104
According to Amara-koa, yma can refer to the green color: triu ymau harit-kau (The word
yma is used in all three genders and means harit (green) or ka (black or dark blue)) (Amara-
koa 3.3.143). The proof that ka can mean black or dark blue is Amara-koas statement ke
nlsita-yma-kla-ymala-mecak (The words nla, asita, yma, kla, ymala, and mecaka all
refer to the ka color) (Amara-koa 1.5.14).
Davayati and viprakarayati mean to carry to a remote place, lead
far away.
3.1.8
Drgh-karae
Drghayati and yamayati mean to lenghten,
delay.
3.1.8
Udvse
Udvasati, ucchann-bhavati, utsdati, and ujjaati mean to banish or
to undress.
3.1.9
ee
Pariiyate and avaiyate mean to remain when they are used in karma-
kartari prayoga.
3.1.10
Saghte
Piayati, styyati, and samhati mean to combine, collect
(intransitive).
3.1.10
Katau
Kayati means to itch,
scratch.
3.1.10
Ghau
Kaati, gharati, upasaharati, and nigamayati mean to rub
together.
Here ends the miscellaneous
section.

San-di-
varga
3.2.1
dhtos tum-arthd icchy sani rpa
bubhati cikiata ity-di-prva-vac

dhtoafter dhtus; tum-arthdwhich are in the infinitive (tum[u]); icchymin

the sense of desiring; saniwhen there is a desiderative; rpamthe form; bubhati
san-anta of bh sattym (1P); cikiatesan-anta of k[a] darane (1A); ity-di-
prva-vatbeginning with such; caand; tmanepadamtmapada.

3.2.2
nmno mntvyaynyasmt kyaci kmye ca
karmaa tmanas tu tad-icchym arthe
sytm ubhe kriye
nmnaafter a nma; ma-anta-avyaya-anyasmtother than an avyaya ending in m;
kyaciwhen [k]ya[c] is applied (the Pinian term for [k]ya[n]; see 600); kmyewhen
kmya follows (606); caand; karmaaafter (a nma which is) a karma; tmana
of oneself; tubut; tat-icchym in the sense of desiring that; arthein the sense of;
sytmshould be; ubheboth; kriyeverbs.
3.2.3
putra-kmyati putryaty k-kmyaty c-
yatti dik eva karmaa cra dhra
upamrthakt
putra-kmyatinma-dhtu of putra + kmya, by 606; putryatinma-dhtu of putra
+ [k]ya[n], by 600-602; c-kmyatinma-dhtu of c + kmya, by 606; c-yati
nma-dhtu of c + [k]ya[n], by 600; itithus; dikin the direction of (for
example); evamsimilarly (the pratyaya [k]ya[n] is applied (see 607)); karmaa
after a karma; crabehavior; dhralocation; upam- arthaktwhich has the
sense of a comparison.
3.2.4
yath putryati cchtra mace
saudhyatti dik upamnt tath kartur
crrthe kriy-dvayam
yathfor example; putryatinma-dhtu of putra + [k]ya[n], by 607; chtram
student; mace on a raised platform; saudhyatinma-dhtu of saudha + [k]ya[n],
by 607; itithus; dikin the direction of (in this way); upamntwhich is a
comparison; tathsimilarly; kartuafter a kart; cra-arthein the sense of
behavior; kriy-dvayamthe two verbs.
3.2.5
kyai ca kvipi ca yath gardabho vyate
vati kyay ojo-psarasor nitya paya-de
ca v sa-luk
kyaiwhen [k]ya[] is applied; caand; kvipiwhen [k]vi[p] is applied; caand; yath
for example; gardabhadonkey; avyatenma-dhtu of ava + [k]ya[], by 609;
avatinma-dhtu of ava + [k]vi[p], by 611-612; kyaiwhen [k]ya[] is applied;
ojas-apsarasoof the words ojas (power) and apsaras (celestial dancing girl);
nityamalways; payas-deafter the word payas (milk) and so on; caand; v
optionally; sa-lukdeletion of sa-rma.
3.2.6
kanypsaryate caujyate hi ka
payyate payasyate tathnyasmt sa-
lopo v dig hyatm
kanygirl; apsaryatenma-dhtu of apsaras + [k]ya[], by Bhat 874; caand;
ojyatenma- dhtu of ojas + [k]ya[], by Bhat 874; ahisnake; kamwater;
payyatenma-dhtu of payas + [k]ya[], by Bhat 874; payasyatenma-dhtu of
payas + [k]ya[], by Bhat 874; tathsimilarly; anyasmtafter other words; sa-lopa
deletion of sa-rma; voptionally; dikin that way; hyatmshould be inferred.

3.2.7
bhde ca bhavaty arthe ty-arthe rpa
bhyate sumanyata ity anyad hya
vyajana-lopata
bha-deof the words bha and so on (see Bhat Amta 878); caand; bhavati
becoming; arthein the sense of; aty-artheexceedingly (in the sense of becoming
that which one wasnt before: adbhta-tad-bhva (Bhat 878)); rpamform;
bhyatenma-dhtu of bha + [k]ya[]; sumanyatenma-dhtu of sumanas +
[k]ya[]; itithus; anyatother; hyamshould be inferred; vyajana-lopata
deletion of the consonant.
3.2.8
suman unman oja capala paita
uci manda-bhadrotsuk nla-ghrdy

sumanashappy; unmanasperplexed; ojasvitality, luster; capalaunsteady;

paitalearned; uciclean; manda-bhadra-utsukslow, gentle, and restless (or
eager); nlablue, dark; ghraquick; dyand so on; caand; bha-daya
the words bha (strong, abundant) and so on.
3.2.9
tatraiva lohitde syd
vikalpentmanepadam lohityati prv
dik sryo ya lohityate
tatrain that way; evaonly; lohita-dethe words lohita and so on; sytis;
vikalpena optionally; tmanepadamtmapada; lohityatinma-dhtu of lohita +
[k]ya[], by Bhat 879; prvbeginning with; dikin that way; sryasun; ayam
the verb; lohityatenma-dhtu of lohita + [k]ya[], by Bhat 879.

3.2.10
lohita yma-jihmau ca garvo dukha
sukha kp mrch nidr ca karu hardy

lohitared; ymadark blue; jihmaucrooked (jihma); caand; garvapride;

dukham unhappiness; sukhamhappiness; kpmercy; mrchswoon,
delusion; nidrsleep; caand; karucompassion; harathrill of rapture; dy
and so on; lohita-dayathe words lohita and so on.

3.2.11
pprtha-kramae kadibhya kayate-
mukh bpoma-phena-dhmt tdvntau

ppa-arthafor the purpose of sinful activity; kramaewhen there is an effort; kaa-

dibhya after kaa and so on; kayate-mukhthe principle ones such as
kayate (nma-dhtu of kaa + [k]ya[], by Bhat 881); bpasteam; uma
heat; phenafoam; dhmtafter dhma (smoke): tubut; udvntauin the sense
of emitting; bpyate-mukhthe principle ones such as bpyate (nma-dhtu
of bpa + [k]ya[], by Bhat 883).
3.2.12
sukhder anubhty-arthe abd dukhyate-
mukh sukha-dukhsra-kpaa-

sukha-dethe words sukha and so on; anubhti-arthewhen the meaning is in the

sense of experiencing; abdwords; dukhyate-mukhthe principle ones such
as dukhyate (nma- dhtu of dukha + [k]ya[], by Bhat 886); sukhahappiness;
dukhaunhappiness; asratears; kpaamiserable, pitiable; karucompassion;
alkafalse, disagreeable, deceit; kcchra difficult; vatlike.

3.2.13
pratipdya ca vidvadbhi sukhdikam
udritam abddibhya ktau abdyate-
vairyate-mukh
pratipdyamshould be explained; caand; vidvadbhiby scholars; sukha-dikam
the words sukha and so on; udritamproclaimed; abda-dibhyaafter the words
abda and so on; ktau when the sense is making; abdyatenma-dhtu of abda
+ [k]ya[], by 613; vairyatenma- dhtu of vaira + [k]ya[], by 613; mukhthe
main ones.
3.2.14
abdo vaira ca kalaha-megha-vegbhra-
durdinam k-sudina-nhrdaya

abdasound; vairamenmity; caand; kalahaquarrel; meghacloud; vega

current, shock; abhracloud; durdinamcloudy day; kdrizzle; sudinafine day;
nhramist, fog, dew; dayaand so on; abda-dayathe words abda and so
on; smtare called.
3.2.15
kav-des tatra kayaty tmane pi
hyate asyatty dika ca prva

ka-deof the words ka and so on; tatrain that regard; kayatinma-

dhtu of ka
+ ya[k], by 618; tmanein the tmanepada; apialso; hyatenma-dhtu of
h[] + ya[k], by 618; asyatinma-dhtu of asu + ya[k], by 618; itithus; dikam
and so on; caand; prvam previously; kicitsometimes; pradaritamseen.
3.2.16
vyajander bhe pauna-punye caika-
svart kriy bobhyate-mukh dhtor na
gte ubhe ruce
vyajana-deof dhtus which begin with a consonant; bhein the sense of
intensity, excessiveness; pauna-punyein the sense of frequent repetition; caand;
eka-svartafter a dhtu which has only one vowel; kriythe verbs; bobhyate
ya-anta of bh sattym (1P); mukh principal ones; dhtoafter the dhtus; na
not; gteafter g abde (9P, pv-di); ubhe after ubh[a] dptau obhrthe
v (1A and 6P); ruceafter ruc[a] dptv abhiprtau ca (1A).
3.2.17
bahula luki tatrpi bobhavty-dik mat
gaty-arthebhya ca kauilye lupder bhva-
garhae
bahulamvariously applied; lukiin regards to the deletion (of ya[]); tatrpistill;
bobhavti cakrapi of bh sattym (1P); dikand so on; matconsidered;
gati-arthebhyaafter dhtus which have the sense of gati; caand; kauilyein the
sense of being crooked (see 590); lupa- deafter the dhtus lup[] chedane (6U) and
so on; bhva-garhaewhen the sense is criticism of the action (592).

3.2.18
tena jagamyate lolupyata ity-dika
bhavet prayojakasya vypre dhtor

tenabecause of that; jagamyateya-anta of gam[] gatau (1P); lolupyateya-anta

of lup[] chedane (6U); ity-dikamsuch verbs and so on; bhavetshould be;
prayojakasyaof the causative agent; vyprein the sense of the function; dhto
after a dhtu; iiwhen i[] ([]i); kte sati is applied.

3.2.19
bhvayaty-di tatrohyam i-antc
ctmanepadam tat karoti tad caa ity-

bhvayaticausative of bh sattym (1P); diand so on; tatrain that regard;

hyamare understood; i-anttafter a dhtu ending in i[] ([]i); caand;
tmanepadamtmapada; tat karotihe does that, he makes that; tad caehe
speaks about that; ity-arthein the sense of; iiwhen i[] ([]i) is applied; ligata
according to inference.
3.2.20
bau muayati kepayatty-dy
kriy mat satya-vedrthas tatrp syt
satypayatti dik
bauma brhmaa boy; muayatinma-dhtu of mua + tat karoti []i, by
617; kepayati nma-dhtu of kipra + []i, by 615, 617; ity-dy kriythese
verbs and so on; mat
considered; satya-veda-arthathe words satya (truth), artha (meaning), and veda
(the
Vedas); tatrathen; pthe gama p[uk] (Bhat 901); sytis; satypayatinma-
dhtu of satya
3.2.21
anyato pi vrata-loka-v-sendin
mata bhavanti tat-tad-artheu
vratayaty-daya kriy
anyataafter other words; apialso; vratavow; lokaverse; vlute; sen
army; din after such words which end in a tty viubhakti (Bhat 898); mata
considered; bhavantiwill be; tat-tat-artheuin the sense of these various meanings;
vratayatinma-dhtu of vrata + []i, by Bhat 895; dayaand so on; kriythe
verbs.
iti san-di-
varga
itithus ends; san-di-vargathe section on the desideratives
and so on.

Now we begin the section on the desideratives

and so on.
3.2.1
San-anta
The form of a dhtu conjugated in the desiderative has the same sense as a dhtu in an
infinitive form followed by a verb meaning to desire. The desiderative forms are
bubhati and so on in the parapada, and cikiate and so on in the tmapada.

3.2.2-3
Nma-dhtus: [k]ya[n] and kmya, [k]ya[] and [k]vi[p].
The pratyayas [k]ya[n] and kmya are applied after any nma except an avyaya
ending with the letter m, provided the nma is a karma. In each case, the resultant
verb is applied in the sense of ones personal desire for that. For example, putra-
105
kmyati and putryati both mean He desires a son . Further, k-kmyati and c-
yati both mean He desires a verse.
3.2.3-4
[K]ya[n] is also applied after a karma in the sense of a comparison in behavior or
location. The forms are similar in this case also. For instance, putryati cchtram (He
treats the student like a son), and mace saudhyati (He behaves on a raised platform
as if he were in a palace).
3.2.4-5
Similarly, [k]ya[] or [k]vi[p] are applied after a kart, in the sense of a comparison of
behavior. An example of verbs with [k]ya[] is gardabho vyate. An example of verbs
with [k]vi[p] is gardabho vati. In both cases, the meaning is The donkey behaves like
a horse.
3.2.5-6
When [k]ya[] is applied after the words ojas and apsaras, there is a deletion of sa-rma.
For instance, kanypsaryate (The girl behaves like an apsara), and ahir ojyate
(The snake acts as if powerful). Similarly, after other words, deletion of sa-rma should
be inferred. However, in the case of payas and so on, the deletion is optional. Examples
are ka payyate and ka payasyate, which both mean Water acts like milk.

3.2.
7
105
There is no rule that only eka-vacana can be used, thus putra-kmyati, as well as putryati, could
mean putrv icchati
The pratyaya [k]ya[] is applied after the bhdis in the sense of becoming that
which one wasnt before, and the final consonant of the bhdis is deleted. For
example, bhyate (He becomes strong), and sumanyate (He becomes happy).

3.2.8
The bhdis are: sumanas, unmanas, ojas, capala, paita, uci, manda, bhadra,
utsuka, nla, ghra,

3.2.9
Similarly, the pratyaya [k]ya[] is applied after the lohitdis in the sense of becoming
that which one wasnt before, and the final consonant of the lohitdis is deleted. In this
case, both parapada and tmapada endings can be used. As an illustration, sryo
lohityati or sryo lohityate (The sun becomes red).

3.2.10
The lohitdis are: lohita, yma, jihma, garva, dukha, sukha, kp, mrch, nidr,
karu, hara, and so on.

3.2.11
Similarly, the pratyaya [k]ya[] is applied after the kadis when the sense is a desire
to do wicked acts. For example, kayate means He desires to do sinful acts. [K]ya[]
is also applied after the words bpa, uma, phena, and dhma when the sense is an
emission. For example, bpyate means It emits steam.

3.2.12
The pratyaya [k]ya[] is also applied after the words sukha and so on when the sense is
to experience. For instance, dukhyate means He experiences unhappiness. In this
context, the most used terms include sukha, dukha, asra, kpaa, karu, alka, and
kcchra.
3.2.13
The learned explain that [k]ya[] is only applied after sukha, dukha, asra, kpaa,
karu, alka, kcchra, and so on [when the experience of happiness, unhappiness
106
and so on is ones own] .
Furthermore, [k]ya[] is also applied after the words abda and so on when the sense is
doing or making. For example, abdyate means He makes noise, and vairyate
3.2.14
The abddis are abda, vaira, kalaha, megha, vega, abhra, durdinam, k, sudina,
nhra, and so on.
3.2.15
In that regard, the pratyaya ya[k] is applied after the kav-dis in the sense of doing.
In this case, parapada and tmapada endings can be applied. For example, kayati
and kayate mean to scratch (the body). Hyati and hyate mean to hate
or to be ashamed. Also, other kav- dis such as asyati (He is envious) are
sometimes seen.
3.2.16
Ya-anta
The pratyaya ya[] is applied after a dhtu that begins with a viujana and has only one
sarvevara, in the sense of repetition or intensity, but not after the dhtus g,
ubh[a], or ruc[a]. An example of a ya-anta is bobhyate (He becomes again and
107
again).
3.2.17-18
Ya-anta and
cakrapi
106
Bhat vtti 886.
107
An example of a ya-anta in the sense of bha or atiaya is: sa sundaro bobhyate (He is
extremely beautiful).
 108
Sometimes ya[] is deleted. An example of a cakrapi is bobhavti (He becomes
again and again). However, the ya-antas and cakrapis are used with dhtus which
express gati only when the sense is crookedness, and after the dhtus beginning with
lup[] only when the sense is criticism
109
of the action.
Examples are jagamyate (It moves crookedly) and lolupyate (He cuts badly).
3.2.18-19
y-anta
The pratyaya []i is applied after a dhtu when there is causation. In this case, either
parapada endings or tmapada endings can be applied. An instance of a y-anta is
bhvayati (He causes to become).

3.2.19-20
Nma-dhtus: tat karoti []i and tad cae []i.
110
The pratyaya []i is applied in the sense of tat karoti or tad cae (see 617) . For
example, bau
muayati (He makes the brhmaa boy bald, i.e He shaves him), and kepayati
(He speaks about the quick thing).
The pratyaya []i is also applied after satya, artha, and veda in the sense of tat karoti
or tad cae, and the pratyaya p[uk] is inserted. An example satypayati (He does
what is right, he speaks the truth).
3.2.21
The pratyaya []i is applied after the word vrata [in the sense of eating only something
111
in particular or abstaining from that] . An example is viu-nivedita vratayati (He
eats only that which has been offered to Viu).
[]i is also applied after a word which ends in a tty viubhakti when a particular
meaning of the
dhtu is understood. Common words used in this regard include loka, v, and
sen.
[For instance, upalokayati means lokair upastauti (He praises with verses),
upavayati means vay upagyati (He sings with the v), and abhieayati
Here ends the section on the desideratives
and so on.

Nnrtha-
varga
3.3.1
athocyate tra nnrth satty
bhavati-kriy ptau janmani ca kvpi

athanow; ucyateis said; atrain this regard; nn-arthvarious meanings;

sattymin the sense of existing; bhavati-kriythe verb bhavati (bh sattym
(1P)); ptauin the sense of obtaining; janmaniin the sense of taking birth; caand;
kvpiin some places; prkayein the sense of becoming manifest; apialso;
udbhavatiud + bh sattym (1P); asauthe verb.
3.3.
2
108
In the system of Pini, a cakrapi is called ya-luk or carkarita. The cakrapis are counted
among the ad-di parapad dhtus (vtti 596).
109
The lup-dis are lup[] chedane (6U), ad[] viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu (1P or 6P), car[a] gatau
(1P), jap[a] vyakty
vci mnase ca (1P), jabh[a] gtra-vinme (3A), dah[a] bhasm-karae (1P), dan[a] dae (1P),
and g nigarae (6P) (592).
110
Tat karoti means He does that, he makes that, and tad cae means He speaks about that.
111
Bhat 895.
112
These examples are taken from Bhat 898. The change to in abhieayati is done by Bhat 909.
shitye sambhave ca syt kriy
sambhavatty asau dyopalambhe
smarthye prabhavaty atha vaibhave
shityein the sense of associating; sambhavein the sense of birth, production,
origin, source; ca and; sytis; kriythe verb; sambhavatisam + bh sattym
(1P); itithus; asauthe verb; dya- upalambhein the sense of perceiving for the
first time; smarthyein the sense of being able, fit for; prabhavatipra + bh
sattym (1P); athastart of a meaning; vaibhavein the sense of being mighty,
magnificent.
3.3.3
vyptau ca syd vibhavati mnase ca
japaty ada ycopatpaivaryeu
nthaty ii nthate
vyptauin the sense of pervading; caand; sytis; vibhavativi + bh sattym
113
(1P); mnasein the sense of thinking, contemplating; caalso ; japatijap[a]
vyakty vci mnase ca (1P); adathe verb; yca-upatpa-aivaryeuin the
senses of begging, causing pain, being master of; nthatinth[]
ycopatpaivarysu (1A); iiin the sense of desiring, wishing for; nthate
nth[] ycopatpaivarysu (1A).
3.3.4
stave bhivdane cpi vandate hldate
puna hlde abde ca saklea-hisayo
kunthatty ada
stavein the sense of praising, eulogizing; abhivdanein the sense of a respectful
salutation, offering prama; caand; apialso; vandatevad[i] abhivdana-stutyo
(abhivdana prama) (1A); hldatehld[] avyakte abde sukhe ca (1A); puna
further; hldein the sense of being delighted; abdein the sense of making a sound;
caand; saklea-hisayoin the senses of suffering, hurting; kunthatikuth[i] his-
sakleayo (1P); itithus; adathe verb.
3.3.5
yc-his-gativ ardaty atha krandati
rodane hvne laghate tu syd upavse
gatv api
yc-his-gatiuin the senses of begging, hurting, killing, going; ardatiard[a]
gatau ycane ca (1P) and ard[a] hisym (10U, yuj-di); athastart of a meaning;
krandatikrad[i] hvne rodane ca (1P); rodanein the sense of crying; hvnein
the sense of calling, summoning; laghate lagh[i] gatau (1A); tuend of a meaning;
sytis; upavsein the sense of fasting; gatauin the sense of going, moving; api
also.
3.3.6
kampane tv agati gatau yc-gatyos
tathcate tayo ca pjane ccaty atha
mohe samucchraye
kampanein the sense of trembling, shaking; tuend of a meaning; agatiag[i]
gatau (1P); gatauin the sense of going, moving; yc-gatyoin the senses of
begging and going; tathin that way; acateac[u] gatau (1U); tayoof them both
(begging and going); caand; pjanein the sense of worshiping; caand; acati
ac[u] gati-pjanayo (1P); athastart of a meaning; mohein the sense of being
bewildered, fainting; samucchrayein the sense of erecting, raising.
3.3.7
mrcchatty atha kauilye svalp-bhve
ca kucati abde garjati nde ca hiate
ndare gatau

113
Due to the use of the word ca (also), the meaning laghccrae (pronouncing
quietly) is included.
mrcchatimrch[] moha-samucchryayo (1P); itithus; athastart of a meaning;
kauilyein the sense of being crooked, dishonest; svalp-bhvein the sense of
becoming small; caand; kucatikuc[a] kauilylp-bhvayo (1P); abdein the
sense of making sound, noise; garjati garj[a] abde (1P); ndein the sense of
making a loud sound, roaring; caand; hiatehi[i] andre gatau ca (1A); andare
in the sense of disrespecting; gatauin the sense of going, moving.
3.3.8
kaaty vti-gatyo syc
chaatty avasdane tath viarae
dndnayor dayate-padam
kaatika[e] varvaraayo (1P); vti-gatyoin the senses of covering and
going; sytis; aatia[a] ruja-viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu (1P); itithus;
avasdanein the sense of being weary, dejected; tathin that way; viaraein the
sense of dividing, piercing; dna-dnayoin the senses of giving and taking; dayate
day[a] rakae dna-gati-hisdneu ca (1A); padamthe verb.

3.3.9
pariplavata ity etac cpale lghave pi
ca
pyate syd viarae durgandhe
pariplavatepari + plu[] gatau (1A); itithus; etatthe verb; cpalein the sense of
being restless; lghavein the sense of being light; apialso; caand; pyatepy[]
viarae durgandhe ca (1A); sytis; viaraein the sense of dividing, splitting up;
durgandhein the sense of smelling bad, being putrid; knyatekny[i] abde unde
ca (1A); tuonly; ihain this sense (durgandhe).
3.3.10
unde ca sphtaty tu plane pi ca
tyate kramyate kramate syt
tyanotsha-vttiu
undein the sense of being wet; caand; sphtatymin the sense of increasing,
being prosperous; tuend of a meaning; planein the sense of protecting; apialso;
caand; tyatety[] vistraa-planayo (1A); kramyatekram[u] pda-vikepe
(4P); kramatekram[u] pda-vikepe
(1P); sytmare; tyana-utsha-vttiuin the senses of increasing, endeavoring, and
being without obstruction.
3.3.11
gatau jagdhau ca carati nipattau tu
phalaty ada tath viarae ctha kalate
abda-sakhyayo
gatauin the sense of going, moving; jagdhauin the sense of eating, consuming; ca
and; carati car[a] gatau (1P); nipattauin the sense of being accomplished; tu
end of a meaning; phalati phal[a] nipattau (nipattir nipdana pratiphalana ca)
(1P) and [i]phal[] viarae (1P); ada the verb; tathin that way; viaraein the
sense of bursting, opening; caand; athastart of a meaning; kalatekal[a]
sakhyne (1A); abda-sakhyayoin the senses of sounding and counting.

3.3.12
jayaty ari-parbhtau syd utkare tv
akarmaka
avaty adarthe ca prya prana-
jayatiji jaye (1P); ari-parbhtauin the sense of defeating an adversary or an
enemy; sytis; utkarein the sense of dragging up, being eminent; tubut;
akarmakawithout a karma; avati av[a] plane (1P); adaa-artheamong
eighteen meanings; caand; pryamostly; prana- rakayoin the senses of
pleasing and protecting.
3.3.13
syn maurejyopanayana-vratdeeu
dkate
sandpane jvane ca dhkate
sytis; maura-ijy-upanayana-vrata-deeuin the senses of shaving,
sacrificing, giving the sacred thread, following a vow, and instructing; dkate
dk[a] maurejyopanayana-vratdeeu (1A); sandpanein the sense of kindling,
exciting; jvanein the sense of living; caand; dhukatedhuk[a] sandpana-
jvana-kleaneu (1A); ikateik[a] vidyopdne (1A); puna again.

3.3.14
jps-vidy-grahaayor dptau svde ca
rocate ksate kapha-je abde dptau

jps-vidy-grahaayoin the senses of desiring to know and gaining knowledge;

dptauin the sense of shining; svdein the sense of being flavorful; caand; rocate
ruc[a] dptau (1A); ksate ks[] ksa-roga-abde (1A); kapha-jein the sense of
being caused by phlegm; abdein the sense of making noise; dptauin the sense
114
of shining ; caand; ayamthe verb; prayogatadue to
usage.
3.3.15
gatau kampe ca calati hare tu madaty
ada glepane ctha phut-kre kroaty
hvna-rodane
gatauin the sense of going, moving; kampein the sense of shaking; caand; calati
cal[a] kampane (1P); harein the sense of being joyful; tuend of a meaning; madati
mad[] hara- glepanayo (1P); adathe verb; glepanein the sense of being poor,
miserable; caand; atha start of a meaning; phut-krein the sense of screaming
out; kroatikru[a] hvne rodane ca (1P); hvna-rodanein the senses of calling
and crying.
3.3.16
ikae kapae cpi kriy
vinayatty asau avasde viarae
sdatty atha dhvati
ikaein the sense of teaching, instructing; kapaein the sense of expelling,
driving away; ca and; apialso; kriyverb; vinayativi + [] prpae (1U); iti
thus; asauthe verb; avasdein the senses of being weary, dejected; viaraein the
sense of bursting, opening; sdatiad[] viaraa-gaty-avasdaneu (1P), by 419; iti
thus; athastart of a meaning; dhvatidhv[u] gati- uddhyo (1P).

3.3.17
gati-uddhyor medhatti medh-hisana-
sagame mithy-jae ghrane ca bhramati
bhramyatty ubhe
gati-uddhyoin the senses of going and purifying; medhatimedh[] medh-hisayo
(1U); iti thus; medh-hisana-sagamein the senses of knowing, hurting, and
meeting; mithy-jaein the sense of misunderstanding, being incorrect; ghranein
the sense of moving to and fro, whirling; caand; bhramatibhram[u] calane (1P);
bhramyatibhram[u] anavasthne (4P); itithus; ubhe the two verbs.

3.3.1
8
114
Rpa Gosvm says the dhtu ks[] ksa-roga-abde (1A) can have the same sense as the
dhtu k[] dptau (1A). This is also the opinion of Jva Gosvm (vtti 455).
hvayate spardhane htau cyatkaa-
pjayo vahati prpaa-syanda-dhtiv
atha dhamaty ada
hvayatehve[] spardhy abde ca (1U); spardhanein the sense of envying,
rivaling; htauin the sense of calling, summoning; cyaticy[] pj-nimanayo
(1U); kaa-pjayoin the senses of perceiving and worshiping; vahativah[a]
prpae (1U); prpaa-syanda-dhtiuin the senses of leading, flowing, and carrying;
athastart of a meaning; dhamatidhm abdgni- sayogayo (1P), by 419; ada
the verb.
3.3.19
nisvannala-phut-ktyor vapaty uptau ca
muane plave taraty uttarae nakatti
gatau srave
nisvana-anala-phut-ktyoin the senses of making a sound and kindling a fire by
blowing; vapati [u]vap[a] bja-tantu-santne chedane pi (1U); uptauin the sense
of sowing; caand; muanein the sense of shaving; plavein the sense of
swimming, floating; taratit plavana-taraayo (plavana jale vahanam, taraa
nady-de pra-gamanam) (1P); uttaraein the sense of crossing over; nakati
ak[a] gatau (1P); itithus; gatauin the sense of going, moving; sravein the sense
of flowing.
3.3.20
gatau skandati oe ca syande ctha
marud-gatau pvitrye pavate his-
gharayos tu kaaty ada
gatauin the sense of falling; skandatiskand[ir] gati-oaayo (gatir atra
skhalanam) (1P); oe in the sense of becoming dry; caand; syandein the sense
of emitting; caand; athastart of a meaning; marut-gatauin the sense of the
movement of the wind; pvitryein the sense of purifying; pavatep[] pavane (1A);
his-gharayoin the senses of hurting and rubbing; tuend of a meaning; kaati
ka[a] hisym (1P); adathe verb.
iti bhv-
di
itithus ends; bhv-dithe section on the dhtus bh
and so on.
3.3.21
pane py upahanty etad auc-
karae pi ca mirae mirae yauti
sauti tu prasavaiyayo
panein the sense of oppressing, giving pain; apialso; upahantiupa + han[a]
his-gatyo (2P); etatthe verb; auc-karaein the sense of making impure; api
also; caand; miraein the sense of mixing; amiraein the sense of
separating; yautiyu miramiraayo (2P); sauti u prasave (2P); tuend of a
meaning; prasava-aiyayoin the senses of permitting, approving, and having power,
being in control.
3.3.22
jna-vivsayo pratyety adhyety
adhigame smtau
piparti prae tre bibharti bhti-
jna-vivsayoin the senses of knowing and believing; pratyetiprati + i[]
gatau (2P); adhyeti adhi + i[] gatau (2P); adhigamein the sense of studying;
smtauin the sense of remembering; pipartip plana-praayo (3P), by 521,
or p plana-praayo (3P), by 521; praein the sense of filling, fulfilling; tre
in the sense of protecting; bibharti[u]bh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); bhti-
poayoin the senses of bearing, carrying, and maintaining, nourishing.
3.3.23
dadhti ctha vivsa-sphayo
raddadhty ada sakalpe vacane ca
syd abhisandhatta ity ada
anusandhatta ity etad vicra-
dadhti[u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); caand; athastart of a meaning;
vivsa- sphayoin the senses of believing and longing for; raddadhtirad +
[u]dh[] dhraa- poaayo (3U); adathe verb; sakalpein the sense of being
determined; vacanein the sense of deceiving; caand; sytis; abhisandhatteabhi
+ sam + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); itithus; adathe verb; anusandhatte
anu + sam + [u]dh[] dhraa-poaayo (3U); iti thus; etatthe verb; vicra-
pratyabhijayoin the senses of examining, analyzing,and recognizing.
ity ad-
di
itithus ends; ad-dithe sub-section on the dhtus
ad[a] and so on.
3.3.24
vijag-dyuti-kr-gati-stutiu dvyati
sarddhi-hisayo radhyaty agkre tu

vijag-dyuti-kr-gati-stutiuin the senses of desiring to conquer, shining, playing,

going, praising; dvyatidiv[u] kr-vijig-vyavahra-dyuti-stuti-knti-gatiu (4P), by
537, 192; sarddhi- hisayoin the senses of accomplishing, being completed,
hurting, killing; radhyatiradh[a] sarddhau hisy ca (4P); agkrein the sense of
agreeing, promising; tuend of a meaning; savidiin the sense of considering,
understanding.
3.3.25
pratipadyata ity etad darpe hare
ca mdyati
kvatve ctha hare ca garvitatve ca
pratipadyateprati + pad[a] gatau (4A); itithus; etatthe verb; darpein the sense of
being proud; harein the sense of being joyful; caand; mdyatimad[] hare (4P,
am-di); kvatvein the sense of being intoxicated; caand; athastart of a
meaning; harein the sense of being joyful; caand; garvitatvein the sense of being
proud; caand; dpyatidp[a] garve (4P).
iti div-
di
itithus ends; div-dithe sub-section on the dhtus div[u]
and so on.
3.3.26
1
pane manthane ctra sandhne
bhiuoty ada gati-vddhyor hinotti

panein the sense of pressing, giving pain; manthanein the sense of churning; ca
and; atrain this regard; sandhnein the sense of distilling; abhiuotiabhi +
u[] abhiave (abhiava sandhna magala-snna v) (5U); adathe verb; gati-
vddhyoin the senses of going and increasing; hinotihi gatau vddhau ca (5P); iti
thus; kotik[] hisym (5U); kti- hisayoin the senses of doing, making,
and hurting, killing.
iti sv-di-
gaa
itithus ends; su-di-gaathe sub-section on the dhtus
u[] and so on.
3.3.27
juate sevana-prtyor muaty
kepa-mardayo
ghuraty rte ca bhme ca abde pi
juateju[] prti-sevanayo (6A); sevana-prtyoin the senses of serving, and
liking, giving pleasure; muatimu[a] kepa-mardanayo (6P); kepa-mardayo
in the senses of reproach, and crushing, rubbing; ghuratighur[a] bhmrtha-
abdayo (6P); rtein the sense of being afflicted, pained; caand; bhmein the
sense of frightening; caand; abdein the sense of making a sound; apialso;
gati-vsayoin the senses of going, moving, and dwelling.
3.3.28
kiyatti kuraty etat pada chede ca
khaane preae si-bhede ca tyge
visjatty ada
kiyatiki nivsa-gatyo (6P); itithus; kuratikur[a] vilekhane (6P); etatthis;
padamverb; chedein the sense of cutting, dividing; caand; khaanein the
sense of breaking into pieces; preaein the sense of sending; si-bhedein
the sense of a particular type of creation; caand; tygein the sense of
abandoning; visjativi + sj[a] visarge (6P); itithus; adathe verb.
3.3.29
ha-bhakrtha-nrthe vihagama-
catupadm lekhane paskirata
tmanepada-su-vidh
ha-bhaka-artha-na-arthewhen the sense is joy, looking for food, or making an
abode (birds nest); viha-gamamoving in the sky (a bird); catu-padmof those
which have four legs; lekhanein the sense of scratching; apaskirateapa + k
vikepe (6P); tmanepada-su-vidhthe two rules concerning tmapada and the
gama s[u].
iti tud-
di
itithus ends; tud-dithe sub-section on the dhtus tud[a]
and so on.
3.3.30
anakti mrakae vyaktau vinakti
calane bhaye surate copabhoge ca
sambhukte iti krtitam
anaktiaj[] vyakti-mrakaa-knti-gatiu (7P); mrakaein the sense of anointing;
vyaktauin the sense of manifesting, making clear; vinakti[o]vij[] bhaya-calanayo
(7P); calanein the sense of trembling; bhayein the sense of fearing; suratein the
sense of amorous pleasure; caand; upabhogein the sense of enjoyment, eating; ca
and; sambhuktesam + bhuj[a] planbhyavahrayo (7P); itithus; krtitam
proclaimed.
iti rudh-di-
gaa
itithus ends; rudh-di-gaathe sub-section on the dhtus rudh[ir]
and so on.
3.3.31
ury-urary-rarbhya ca karoti kurute
pade vistrg-karaayor vikriyy tv
akarmakam pada vikurute abda-
karmakrthe ca sammatam
 115
ury-urary-rarbhyaafter the words ur, r, urar, and rar ; caand; karoti
[u]k[] karae (8U); kurute[u]k[] karae (8U); padethe two verbs; vistra-ag-
karaayoin the senses of extending and accepting, agreeing (vtti 777); vikriyym
in the sense of transforming; tubut; akarmakamwithout a karma; padamthe verb;
vikurutevi + [u]k[] karae (8U); abda- karmaka-arthein the meaning where the
karma is a sound; caand; sammatamconsidered.
iti tan-di-
gana
itithus ends; tan-di-ganathe sub-section on the dhtus tan[u]
and so on.
3.3.32
rti mirae pke pti tra-
prae ghty etad updne jne
ghta ity api avaabhnti tu
proktam antiklambanrthayo
rti r[] pke (9U); miraein the sense of mixing; pkein the sense of
cooking; ptip plana-praayo (9P, pv-di); tra-praein the senses of
protecting and filling; ghti grah[a] updne (9U, pv-di); etatthe verb; updne
in the sense of accepting, taking; jnein the sense of perceiving; ghtegrah[a]
updne (9U, pv-di); itithus; apialso; avaabhnti stanbh[u] rodhane (sautra-
dhtu), by Bhat 917; tuend of a meaning; proktamcalled; antika- lambana-
arthayoin the senses of being near, approaching, and taking support.
iti kry-di-
gaa
itithus ends; kry-di-gaathe sub-section on the dhtus
[u]kr[] and so on.
3.3.33
lakayaty akane dau gaty
vjayatty ada ara-saskarae ctha
mraa-jpandiu
lakayatilak[a] darankayo (10P); akanein the sense of marking; dauin
the sense of seeing, perceiving; gatymin the sense of motion; vjayativaj[a]
116
mrga-saskra-gatyo (10P) ; itithus; adathe verb; ara-saskaraein the
sense of preparing an arrow; caand; atha
start of a meaning; mraa-jpana-diuin the senses of killing and informing.
3.3.34
japayaty atha bhy pramode
maayaty atha chedane prae cpi
pada vardhayatty ada
japayatijap[a] (jna-jpana-)mradau (10P, gha-di); athastart of a meaning;
bhymin the sense of ornamenting; pramodein the sense of being blissful;
maayatima[i] bhym (10P); athastart of a meaning; chedanein the sense
of cutting, dividing; praein the sense of filling; caand; apialso; padamthe
verb; vardhayativardh[a] chedana-praayo (10P); itithus; adathe verb.

3.3.35
bhede nimantrahtyor mantrayata
ity ada
nirytayati vairasya uddhau
bhedein the sense of a particular kind; nimantraa-htyoin the senses of inviting,
and bringing;
mantrayate[] + matr[i] gupta-bhae (10A); itithus; adathe verb; nirytayati
115
For a further discussion on the ury-dis, see vtti 777 and the footnote in the word-for-
word synonyms of
Prayuktkhyta-majar 1.2.24.
116
This dhtu can be found in Mdhavy dhtu-vtti.
nikropaskrayo (nira ca pratidne) (10P); vairasyaof enmity; uddhauin
the sense of purifying; nysa-arpaein the sense of repaying; tathin that
way.
3.3.36
vara-kriy-guoktyos tu varayaty
atha jvane bale corjayaty rjayate
hr-ruos tu hyate
vara-kriy-gua-uktyoin the senses of making colorful and praising, describing the
good qualities; tuend of a meaning; varayativara vara-kriy-vistra-gua-
vacaneu (10P); atha start of a meaning; jvanein the sense of living; balein the
sense of being strong; caand; rjayatirj[a] bala-prayor dhrae (10U); rjayate
rj[a] bala-prayor dhrae (10U); hr- ruoin the senses of being shy and
being angry; tuend of a meaning; hyatenma-dhtu of h[] gh-lajjayo
(kav-di) (h + ya[k], by 618).
3.3.37
tyate ghy ca pj-vddhyor
mahyate
bhojane tan-nivttau ca pada
tyatet[a] ghym (sautra-dhtu), by 417; ghymin the sense of contempt,
hate; caand; pj-vddhyoin the senses of worshiping and increasing; mahyate
nma-dhtu of mah[] pjym (kav-di) (mah + ya[k], by 618); bhojanein the
sense of eating, enjoying; tat-nivttau in the sense of abstaining from that; caand;
padamthe verb; vratayatinma-dhtu of vrata + [[i, by Bhat 895; itithus; ada
the verb.
3.3.38
valgyati tu mdhurye pjane ca
prakrtitam
valgyatinma-dhtu of valgu pj-mdhuryayo (kav-di) (valgu + ya[k], by 618);
tuend of a meaning; mdhuryein the sense of being charming, sweet, and elegant;
pjanein the sense of honoring; caand; prakrtitamdeclared.

iti cur-di-
gaa
itithus ends; cur-di-gaathe sub-section on the dhtus cur[a]
and so on.
ity anekrtha-
varga
itithus ends; aneka-artha-vargathe section on the manifold meanings
of dhtus.

Now we begin the section on the various meanings of

individual dhtus.
3.3.1
117
Bhv-dis
Bhavati means to exist or to obtain.
Udbhavati means to take birth, come into being, and sometimes to be
manifest.
3.3.2
Sambhavati means to come in connection with or to take birth, come into
118
being.
119
Prabhavati means to emanate, spring or to be able, fit for.
117
We have put this heading here based on the ending iti bhv-di that comes after 3.3.20.
118
Sambhavati can also have the sense of sambhvana (certainty, or assumption). For example,
sambhavati can be translated as it must be or it could be.
119
See prabhave tat-sthnam (655).
3.3.3
Vibhavati means to be powerful, magnificent or to
pervade. Japati means to chant quietly or to chant
in the mind. Nthati means to beg, to cause pain,
or to be master of.
120
Nthate means to desire, wish for.
3.3.4
Vandate means to praise or to offer
obeisances. Hldate means to be
delighted or to sound. Kunthati means to
suffer or to hurt.
3.3.5
Ardati means to beg, to hurt, or to go,
move. Krandati means to cry or to call,
summon. Laghate means to fast or to
go, move.
3.3.6
Agati means to tremble, shake or to go,
move.
Acate means to beg or to go, move.
Acati means to beg, to go, move, or to
3.3.7
Mrcchati means to faint, become bewildered or to erect,
become stiff.
Kucati means to be crooked or to become small.
Garjati means to sound or to roar.
Hiate means to disrespect or to go, move.
3.3.8
Kaati means to cover or to go.
aati means to be weary, dejected or to divide,
pierce.
Dayate means to give or to take.
3.3.9
Pariplavate means to be restless or to be light.
Pyate means to divide, split up or to stink, be
putrid.
Knyate means to stink or to be wet.
3.3.10
Tyate means to expand or to protect.
Kramyate and kramate mean to increase, to endeavor, or to be without
121
obstruction.
3.3.11
Carati means to go, move or to eat.
Phalati means to be accomplished or to burst,
open.
Kalate means to sound or to count.
3.3.1
2

120
See Bhat vtti 1124 for a discussion of when tmapada endings are applied after the dhtu
nth[].
121
tmapada endings are applied after the dhtu kram[u] by the stra vtty-utsha-sphtatsu
krame, An tmapada ending is applied after kram[u] when the meaning is vtti (absence of
obstruction), utsha (endeavor), or sphtat (increase) (Bhat 1142). In this verse, the sense
Jayati means to defeat an adversary. Jayati can also mean to be eminent, glorious.
In that sense, it does not take a karma.
Avati means to please or to protect. Out of the eighteen meanings of this verb,
these two are the most common.

3.3.13
Dkate means to shave, to sacrifice, to give the to follow a vow, or
sacred thread, instruct. to
Dhukate means to kindle or to live.
ikate means to desire to know or to obtain
knowledge.
3.3.14
Rocate means to shine or to
please.
Kate means to cough or to
3.3.15
Calati means to go, move or to shake.
Madati means to be joyful or to be poor,
miserable.
Kroati means to call, or to cry.
3.3.16
Vinayati means to teach, instruct or to expel.
Sdati means to be weary, dejected or to burst,
123
open.
Dhvati means to go, move or to purify.
3.3.17
Medhati means to know, to hurt, or to meet.
Bhramati and bhramyati mean to misunderstand, be incorrect or to move to
and fro, whirl.
3.3.18
Hvayate means to challenge, compete or to
call.
Cyati means to perceive or to worship.
Vahati means to lead, to flow, or to carry.
Dhamati means to sound or to kindle a fire by
3.3.19
Vapati means to sow or to shave.
Tarati means to swim, float or to
cross. Nakati means to go, move
or to flow.
3.3.20
Skandati means to fall, to dry up, or to emit
(semen). Pavate means to blow (in regard to the
wind) or to purify. Kaati means to hurt or to
rub.

122
Contrary to Bhaa-malla in khyta-candrik, rla Rpa Gosvm says the dhtu k[] dptau
(1A) can have the same sense as the dhtu ks[] ksa-roga-abde (1A). This is also the opinion of
Jva Gosvm, who adds that ks[] ksa- roga-abde can have the sense of k[] dptau. This is
supported by Bh-vtti, which gives the example kscakre pur saudhai (The city was
resplendent with mansions) (vtti 455).
123
The dhtu ad[] is also frequently used in the senses of sthiti (to dwell, be situated) and
upaveana (to sit down).
For example, rdhara Svm explains the word uci-ada <1.3> in Bhgavatam 11.6.19 to mean
svrama-dharma- sthit (situated in the duties of their own rama). Vivantha Cakravart
hkura, commenting on Bhgavatam 7.1.22, explains the word sad in tat-sada <6.1> by saying
sdanti nidanty upavianty asym iti sat sabh (The word sad means a sabh (assembly house)
Here ends the sub-section on the first class
dhtus.
3.3.21
Ad-dis
Upahanti means to oppress, give pain or to make
impure.
Yauti means to mix or to separate.
Sauti means to approve, permit or to have power.
3.3.22
Pratyeti means to know or to believe.
Adhyeti means to study or to
remember. Piparti means to fill, fulfill or
to protect.
Bibharti means to hold, bear or to support,
3.3.23
Dadhti means to hold, bear or to support,
nourish. raddadhti means to believe or to long
for. Abhisandhatte means to aim at or to
deceive.
Anusandhatte means to examine, analyze or to recognize,
Here ends the sub-section on the second class and third
class dhtus.
3.3.24
Div-dis
Dvyati means to desire, to conquer, to shine, to play, to go, or
to praise.
Radhyati means to accomplish, be completed or to hurt, kill.
3.3.25
Pratipadyate means to agree, promise or to consider,
understand. Mdyati means to be proud, to be joyful, or
to be intoxicated. Dpyati means to be joyful or to be
proud.
Here ends the sub-section on the fourth class
dhtus.
3.3.26
Sv-dis
Abhiuoti means to press, give pain, to churn, or
124
distil.
Hinoti means to go, move or to increase.

Here ends the sub-section on the fifth class

dhtus.
3.3.27
Tud-dis
Juate means to like, to give pleasure or to serve.
Muati means to reproach or to crush, grind.
Ghurati means to be distressed, to frighten, or to
sound.
3.3.28
Kiyati means to go, move or to dwell.
Kurati means to cut, divide or break into
pieces.
Visjati means to send, to create, or to
124
After an upendra, the sa-rma of the dhtu su[] changes back to a-
rma (Bhat 909).
3.3.29
The verb apaskirate is used in the sense of scratching the earth, when the sense is
either joy, looking for food, or making a dwelling place. In all cases, a four-legged
125
animal or a bird has to be the subject.

Here ends the sub-section on the sixth class

dhtus.
3.3.30
Rudh-dis
Anakti means to anoint or to manifest, make clear.
Vinakti means to tremble or to fear.
Sambhukte means to delight in amorous pleasure or to
eat, enjoy.
Here ends the sub-section on the seventh class
dhtus.
3.3.31
Tan-dis
Karoti and kurute, when applied after ur, r, urar, or rar, mean to extend or to
accept, agree.
Vikurute means to undergo a tranformation or to
126
utter.
Here ends the sub-section on the eighth class
dhtus.
3.3.32
Kry-dis
rti means to mix, prepare or to cook, bake, and
so on.
Pti means to protect or to fill, fulfill.
Ghti and ghte mean to take, accept or to
perceive.
Here ends the sub-section on the ninth class
dhtus.
3.3.33
Cur-dis
Lakayati means to mark or to perceive.
Vjayati means to go or to sharpen and trim an
arrow.
3.3.34
Japayati means to kill or to inform.
Maayati means to adorn or to be
blissful. Vardhayati means to cut or to
128
fill.
125
tmapada endings are applied after the dhtu k (6P) when it is preceded by the upendra apa and
when there are the meanings of either joy, livelihood, or making an abode: hare ca jviky ca,
kulya-karae pi ca, apaskira (Bhat 1125). This rule only applies when four legged animals or birds
are the karts. Pini says there should also be scratching of the earth. S[u] is also irregularly applied
for the sake of pointing out lakan-vtti (figurative usage of a word) since the kart is not a human.
For example, apaskirate vabha ha, pdena mttikdika vikipattyartha, (The bull, being
delighted, gores the earth) (Bhat vtti 1125).
126
tmapada endings are applied after vi + k when its karma is a sound or when it is akarmaka:
adhe prasahane abda-
karmao karmakc ca ve (Bhat 1140). For instance, vikurute paya (The milk undergoes a
transformation), and
vikurute kaha-svaram (He utters a guttural vowel (a or )) (Bhat vtti 1140). Siddhnta-kaumud
(2706-2708) says vi
+ k, when akarmaka, has the meaning vikra labhate.
127
For example, avaabhnti sen (The army draws near), and avaabhnti daam (He leans on
3.3.35
mantrayate means to invite or to bring
near.
Nirytayati means to repay or to forgive,
3.3.36
Varayati means to make colorfulor to praise, describe good
qualities.
rjayati and rjayate mean to live or to be strong.
Hyate means to be shy, ashamed or to be angry.
3.3.37
tyate means to be angry or to feel contempt,
hate. Mahyate means to be worshiped or to
increase, prosper. Vratayati means to eat or to
129
abstain.

3.3.38
Valgyati means to be beautiful, charming or to
Here ends the sub-section on the tenth class
dhtus.
Here ends the section on the manifold meanings of
individual dhtus.

Akarmaka-
dhtava
3.4.1
sa-karmako py akarm syd vivak cen na
karmaa kvpy akarmpi karmhyo

sa-karmakawith a karma; apieven; akarmwihout a karma; sytis; vivak

desire to signify; cetif; nanot; karmaaof a karma; kva-apisometimes;
akarmwithout a karma; apieven; karma-hyaendowed with a karma;
bhvanymwhen the desire to express, signify; bhavetis; ihain this
connection.
3.4.2
ata syn nti-naiyatyam akarmaka-
sakarmao dhtavo thpi likhyante pryo

atatherefore; sytis; nanot; ati-naiyatyamvery settled; akarmaka-sakarmao

in regards to being akarmaka or sa-karmaka; dhtavadhtus; athanow; api
also; likhyanteare written; pryafor the most part; yewhich; syuare;
akarmakwithout a karma.
3.4.3
sattym udaye snehe moha-snna-
viuddhiu ayansana-lajjsu jvane

sattymin the sense of existence; udayein the sense of rising; snehein the
sense of being affectionate; moha-snna-viuddhiuin the senses of being
bewildered, bathing, becoming pure;
bhuja-daopari bhartu, chatr-bhva nma yathrtha svam akart. Commenting on the words
nma yathrtham (appropriately named), Baladeva Vidybhaa says govardhana can mean
One who smashes the thunderbolt (g vardhayati). This is because Amara-koa says go can
mean vajra (thunderbolt): svargeu-pau-vg-vajra-di- netra-dhi-jale (Amara-koa 3.3.25).
The usual vigraha of govardhana is g vardhayati. In this sense, vardhayati is the causative form
of the dhtu vdh[u] vddhau (1A).
129
Bhat 895.
ayana-sana-lajjsuin the senses of sleeping, sitting, being shy, being ashamed;
jvanein the sense of living; maraein the sense of dying; krudhiin the sense
of being angry.
3.4.4
tvary krane ntye rodana-sthiti-
dptiu
bhaye syande ca sandehe oa-spardh-
tvarymin the sense of being quick, being hasty; kranein the sense of playing,
sporting; ntyein the sense of dancing; rodanain the sense of crying; sthitiin the
sense of standing, remaining; dptiuin the sense of shining;bhayein the sense of
being afraid; syandein the sense of flowing; caand; sandehein the sense of being
in doubt; oain the sense of becoming dry; spardhin the sense of being envious,
being competitive; kayeuin the sense of decaying, decreasing; apialso.

3.4.5
madodvega-prakampeu vyath-jgara-
vddhiu jary svadanotpattyor

madain the sense of being joyful; udvegain the sense of being agitated, being
distressed; prakampeuin the sense of trembling, shaking; vyathin the sense of
being in pain; jgarain the sense of awakening; vddhiuin the sense of growing,
increasing; jarymin the sense of becoming old; svadanain the sense of being
tasty; utpattyoin the sense of being born, being produced; mtraein the sense of
urinating; hadanein the sense of evacuating; tathin that way.
3.4.6
vike mlane hrse na-sphrti-
samddhiu toe doe virge ca

vikein the sense of blooming; mlanein the sense of closing (in regards to the
eyes and the flowers); hrsein the sense of becoming short; nain the sense of
perishing; sphrtiin the sense of quivering, throbbing, being thrilled; samddhiuin
the sense of being prosperous, being opulent; toein the sense of being satisfied,
content; doein the sense of being at fault, being deficient; virgein the sense of
being detached, indifferent; caand; vidain the sense of being despondent,
depressed; unmdain the sense of being intoxicated, being crazy; siddhiuin the
sense of being accomplished, completed.
3.4.7
prabhty-aivarya-dambheu uklimdi-
gueu ca dhvanau klaibye daridratve glni-
garva-ramev api
prabhtiin the sense of appearing, being radiant; aivaryain the sense of being
powerful; dambheu-in the sense of being deceitful; uklima-di-gueuin the sense
of whiteness and so on; caand; dhvanauin the sense of making sound, making an
echo; klaibyein the sense of being impotent, being a coward; daridratvein the
sense of being poor; glniin the sense of being tired, being exhausted; garvain the
sense of being proud; rameuin the sense of exertion; apialso.
3.4.8
kobhdiu tathrtheu dhtava syur
akarmak y-ant lohitdy ca tath ye
nma-dhtava
kobha-diuin the sense of shaking, stumbling; tathin that way; artheu
according to the meaning; dhtavadhtus; syuare; akarmakwithout a karma;
y-antwhich end in ya (after the application of [k]ya[]); lohita-dythe words
lohita and so on (Bhat Amta 879); ca and; tathin that way; yewhich; nma-
dhtavanma-dhtus.
3.4.9
tmanas tat-tad-icchy bhaveyus te py
akarmak arthaikye py artha-bhede pi
svayam eva dvidh sthiti eka kacid bhaved
dhtur upasarga-vat tath
tmanaof oneself; tat-tat-icchymwhen there are various desires; bhaveyu
shall be; tethey; apialso; akarmakwithout a karma; artha-aikyein the same
meaning; apieven; artha- bhedein a different meaning; apieven; svayamby
itself; evaonly; dvidhtwofold; sthiti condition; ekaone; kacidsome; bhavet
would be; dhtudhtu; upasarga-vatdue to the influence of an upendra; tath
in that way.
3.4.10
yath kumbht karaty ambho mada karati
kujara jayatvara utkare jayaty abhibhave
ripum
yathfor example; kumbhtfrom the jug; karatiflows; ambhawater; madam
secretion (from the temples of an elephant in rut); karatitrickles; kujara
elephant; jayatimay he be glorious; varathe Lord; utkarein the sense of
eminence; jayativanquishes; abhibhavein the sense of conquering; ripum
enemy.
3.4.11
nikhila vetti govinda savitte mdhava
svayam vndvane vasaty asmin harir
vasati vrajam
nikhilamentirety; vettiknows; govindaGovinda; savitteknows; mdhava
Mdhava; svayamhimself; vndvanein Vndvana; vasatiresides; asminin this;
hariHari; vasati dwells; vrajamVraja.

3.4.12
tath hi
dhtv-artha bdhate kacit kacit tam
anuvartate tam eva viinay anyo
narthako nya prayujyate
tath hifor example; dhtu-arthammeaning of a dhtu; bdhateblocks; kacit
some; kacit some; tamthat (meaning); anuvartateis in conformity with; tam
that; evaonly; viinai specifies; anyaanother; anarthakameaningless;
anyaanother; prayujyateemployed.
3.4.13
duh-dy n-vah-dy ca dhtavo ye dvi-
karmak te vistara-bhayd atra granthe
vilikhit na hi
duh-dythe dhtu duh[a] praprae (2U) and so on; n-vah-dythe dhtus
[] prpae (1U), vah[a] prpae (1U), and so on; caand; dhtavadhtus; ye
which; dvi-karmaktake two karmas (vtti 639); tethey; vistara-bhaytout of
fear of increasing; atrain here; granthein the scripture; vilikhitwritten; na hi
not.
3.4.14
atrtmanepaddes tu prakriy na hi
krtit tatas tato vykarad vijey

atrain here; tmanepada-deof tmapada and so on; tuonly; prakriychapter;

na hinot; krtitdescribed; tata tata vykaratfrom various grammars;
vijeyunderstood; sthat; vicakaaiby clever individuals.
3.4.15
mud yathrtha-nmnya kavi-sraga-
ragad sevyat kovida-gaai

mudwith joy; yath-artha-nmnwhose name is suitable; iyamthis; kavi-sraga-

raga-d which gives pleasure to the bees that are the scholars; sevyatmmay it be
studied; kovida-gaai by learned persons; prayukta-khyta-majarflower of verbs
that are actually in use.
iti prayuktkhyta-majary ttya
ka
itithus ends; prayukta-khyta-majarymin Prayuktkhyta-majar; ttya
third; ka
chapter.
prayuktkhyta-majar
sampt
prayuktkhyta-majar the scripture Prayuktkhyta-majar; samptis
brought to a conclusion.

Now we begin the section on the dhtus which are

akarmaka.
3.4.1
Sometimes, sa-karmaka dhtus can become akarmaka if there is no desire to
indicate a karma.
Similarly, akarmaka dhtus can take a karma if there is a desire to express a
3.4.2
Therefore, sa-karmaka dhtus and akarmaka dhtus are not fixed as such. Now, the
dhtus that are generally akarmaka shall be mentioned.

3.4.3-8
A dhtu is known as akarmaka when it conveys any one of the following senses:
satt (existing), udaya (rising), sneha (being affectionate), moha (being
bewildered), snna (bathing), viuddhi (becoming pure), ayana (sleeping),
sana (sitting), lajj (being shy, being ashamed), jvana (living), maraa
(dying), krudh (being angry), tvar (being quick), krana (playing),
ntya (dancing), rodana (crying), sthiti (standing, remaining, abiding),
dpti (shining), bhaya (being fearful), syanda (flowing), sandeha (being in
doubt), oa (becoming dry), spardh (being envious, being competitive),
kaya (decreasing, decaying), mada (being joyful), udvega (being agitated,
being distressed), prakampa (trembling, shaking), vyath (being in pain),
jgara (awakening), vddhi (growing, increasing), jar (becoming old),
svadana (being tasty), utpatti (being born, being produced), mtraa
(urinating), hadana (evacuating), vika (bloomimg), mlana (closing (in
regard to eyes or flowers)), hrsa (becoming short), na (perishing), sphrti
(quivering, throbbing, being thrilled), samddhi (being prosperous, being
opulent), toa (being satisfied), doa (being at fault, being deficient), virga
(being disinterested), vida (being despondent, depressed), unmda (being
intoxicated, being crazy), siddhi (being accomplished, being completed),
prabhti (becoming visible, being radiant), aivarya (being powerful),
dambha (being deceitful), uklimdi-gua (being white, being colored, and so
on), dhvani (making an echo, making sound), klaibya (being impotent, being a
Similarly, the nma-dhtus which begin with a lohitdi and end in [k]ya[] are also
130
akarmaka.

3.4.9
Akarmaka dhtus can become sa-karmaka and sa-karmaka dhtus can become
akarmaka, according to the particular expression the author wants the verb to convey.
In such cases the dhtus will sometimes be used in the same meaning and sometimes
in a different meaning. Moreover, due to an upendra, an akarmaka dhtu may become
sa-karmaka and, conversely, a sa-karmaka dhtu may become akarmaka.
3.4.10
An example of a sentence where the dhtu is used in its inherent sense of akarmaka is:
kumbht karaty ambha (Water flows from the jug). The following example shows
how the same akarmaka dhtu becomes sa-karmaka: mada karati kujara (The
elephant exudes a fluid). Here the dhtu has the same meaning both when it is
akarmaka and sa-karmaka.
Now a counterexample is given. The dhtu ji is inherently sa-karmaka but it becomes
akarmaka according to a particular meaning of that dhtu. Corresponding examples
are: varo jayati ripum (The Lord defeats the enemy), and varo jayati (All glories
to the Lord). Here the dhtu has a different meaning when it is sa-karmaka and when
it is akarmaka.
3.4.11
Now, a case of a sa-karmaka dhtu becoming akarmaka because of the use of an
upendra is presented: nikhila vetti govinda (Govinda knows everything), and
131
savitte mdhava svayam (Mdhava understands by Himself).

Conversely, it is shown how an akarmaka dhtu becomes sa-karmaka due to the

presence of a particular upendra: vndvane vasaty asmin hari (Hari lives here in
132
Vndvana), and harir vasati vrajam (Hari dwells in Vraja).

3.4.12
Some upendras block the meaning of the dhtu, some carry forward the meaning of the
dhtu, others specify a meaning of the dhtu, and others are employed as meaningless
things.
3.4.13
Out of fear of increasing the size of this book, the dvi-karmaka dhtus such as
duh, , and vah
133
(prpae) have not been described.
3.4.14
For this reason also, a chapter regarding the use of tmapada and parapada under
special circumstances has not been written. Those who are intelligent can learn
about this from various grammars.

3.4.15
May the learned joyfully study this Prayuktkhyta-majar which is suitably named
because it is a flower of practical verbs that gives pleasure to the bee-like scholars.

Here ends the third chapter of Prayuktkhyta-

majar.
130
The following words are called the lohitdis: lohita (red), nla (blue), harita (green), pta
(yellow), madra (joy), phea (foam), manda (slow), carman (skin), varman (armor), nidr
(sleep), tandr (laziness), kp (mercy), karu (compassion), gh (compassion,
contempt), and kek (the cry of a peacock). According to Kik and other authorities, the lohitdis
are an kti-gaa (the list is not exhaustive) (Bhat Amta 879).
131
The dhtu vid[a] jne (2P) becomes tmapad by this stra: sama pcchati-gam-cchi-sv-
rubhyo vettitas tath do
rte ckarmakatve (Bhat 1132).
132
This grammatical variation is explained by the stra upnv-adhy-bhyo vasa dhra karma (650).
 Table of
corrections
Vers
e Correction Changed from Reference
numb
1.1.5 rjayaty urjayaty khyta-candrik
134
1.1.8 vddhi-bhede buddhi-bhede 1.1.5
See footnote
1.1.8 samdhyati samddhyati
1.1.10 vikse vike khyta-candrik
1.1.13 viryate viryati 1.1.9
khyta-candrik
1.1.13 vidryate vidryati 1.1.12
1.1.14 hrasaty hrasvaty khyta-candrik
1.1.14 atha atra 1.1.13
1.1.18 viramaty viramyaty khyta-candrik
1.2.3 caturdaa caturdaa 1.1.17
1.2.8 daa daa
1.2.10 v ity khyta-candrik
135
1.2.24 urary-ry- urary-ry-urarbhya 1.2.8
See footnote
1.2.26 rarbhya
catasro catastro
1.2.28 vicyaty nicyaty khyta-candrik
1.3.9 caturdaa caturdaa 1.2.29
1.3.13 ekdavagaayaty ekdaa avagaayaty
1.3.19 apardhyati apdrdhyati khyta-candrik
tv etad- dve tad-anyath dve 1.3.12
1.4.9 anyathtve 'sat- ktau khyta-candrik
1.4.10 jugupsate jagupsate khyta-candrik
1.4.22 ctra ctha 1.3.23
1.5.3 sphrjaty sphurjaty khyta-candrik
1.5.4 kavate kavati 1.5.11
khyta-candrik
1.5.8 ksate kate 1.5.1
khyta-candrik
2.1.2 atraiva athaiva 1.5.16
2.1.4 utpdayaty updayaty khyta-candrik
2.1.4 nirmimte nirmte 2.1.3
khyta-candrik
2.1.6 pravartata pravartate 2.1.3
2.1.13 maati maate khyta-candrik
2.1.13 avatase 'vatasati avatase vatasati 2.1.11
2.1.15 bhsate bhate khyta-candrik
2.1.19 krdate kdante 2.1.14
khyta-candrik
2.1.20 sdye sdye 'trnukalpata 2.1.17
2.1.20 'trnukalpate
kriy-dvay kry-dvay
am dhitsaty udanyati pipsaty api
2.1.21 udanyati pipsati tarati khyta-candrik

134
khyta-candrik also has the reading buddhi-bhede, but this makes no sense, as the section
is bhva-vikra, not buddhi-vikra.
135
khyta-candrik 3.3.204 has the reading ry-urary-rarbhya, Prayuktkhyta-majar
1.4.21 says ury-rary- urarbhya.
 136
2.1.23 jamaty jematy See footnote
2.1.31 paryeti paryati khyta-candrik
2.1.32 sv-karoty sv-kroty 2.3.47
2.1.36 vvtyate vyvty atra khyta-candrik
kmayate kmayate tra 2.1.41
rirasate tra vasyati rirasate
vasyati cet cet para- yoitam 137
2.1.41 See footnote
2.1.42 para-
av yoit ava khyta-candrik
2.1.43 yabhaty yabhapy 2.1.47
khyta-candrik
2.1.45 kunthati kuthnati 2.1.49
2.2.7 bhajaty yajaty yajati is in verse
2.2.10 nirmacaty nirmachaty 2.2.12
2.2.11 layaty llayaty khyta-candrik
2.2.14 sparayati sparayate 2.2.10
khyta-candrik
2.2.15 tmane atmane 2.2.11
2.2.16 vaua vaua
2.2.17 prakipyatty prakipvatty khyta-candrik
2.2.20 dhpane dhvane 2.2.14
khyta-candrik
2.2.27 madra madr 2.2.18
Bhat 3173
2.2.29 mumukate mumukata khyta-candrik
2.2.30 samdhatte samdhatta 2.2.30
2.3.7 dva dve
2.3.12 tmane tmane 'naruaddhti khyta-candrik
2.3.13 shye
'nuruaddhti sahye 2.3.13
khyta-candrik
2.3.18 klbate klvate 2.3.15
khyta-candrik
2.3.19 klbyate klvyate 2.3.21
khyta-candrik
2.3.19 vakate valkate 2.3.21
khyta-candrik
2.3.21 daayate saayate 2.3.22
khyta-candrik
2.3.24 prekhati prakhati 2.3.26
khyta-candrik
2.3.26 sravati sravate 2.3.29
khyta-candrik
2.3.27 krmatyarti krmatyartti 2.3.32
2.3.31 haukae hokae
2.3.36 valate balate khyta-candrik
2.3.42 bhrasata bhraata 2.3.29
khyta-candrik
2.3.46 prypa pryopa 2.3.51
2.3.51 sannikate sannikarate khyta-candrik
2.3.60 dhnane dhunane 2.3.59
2.3.68 chedayaty chidayaty
2.3.71 kveati kveate
2.3.71 siha-vad-nde siha-vadan-nde
2.3.72 ojyate urjyate khyta-candrik
2.3.75 pramthayaty pramyayaty 2.3.79
2.3.75 nirvpayaty nibarhayaty khyta-candrik
2.3.75 thati tehi 2.3.75

136
Although khyta-candrik (2.1.26) has the reading jematy anti jamati, jamati is seen more
often than jemati. In his Dhtu-pha, Jva Gosvm lists jam[u] but not jim[i]. The dhtu jim[i]
adane (1P) is a rare dhtu found in Mdhavy dhtu-vtti only. The indicatory letter i in jim[i] is an
i[k] (see 909).
137
khyta-candrik 2.1.45-46 reads (45) atha kmane rirasate kmayate yiyapsati (46) vasyati,
 2.3.87 nirghtayaty nirgtayaty
2.4.1 karaty karate khyta-candrik
2.4.2 upta-kau upta-kau 2.4.1
2.4.2 amb av khyta-candrik
2.4.2 dvi-kau dvi-kau 2.4.3
khyta-candrik
2.4.3 hanyni ahanyni 2.4.3
khyta-candrik
2.4.9 sambibhartti savibhartti 2.4.4
khyta-candrik
2.4.15 tulyau tulye 2.4.12
khyta-
2.4.37 etv etad candrik2.4.20
khyta-
2.4.39 uddyotayati udyodayati candrik2.4.44
2.4.43 abhiave bhiave khyta-candrik
2.5.1 vayate vayati vayate-vayat 2.4.52
khyta-candrik
2.5.5 chyati cchyati 2.5.1
2.5.10 ulluhaty ullahaty Mdhavy dhtu-
2.5.10 bald-dhtau balt-ktau khyta-candrik
vtti
2.5.12 lchatty lcchatty 2.5.11
2.5.17 satrayate satryate khyta-
3.1.7 dur-ktau dur-katau candrik2.5.21
3.1.8 tdvasaty ndvasaty
putryaty k- putryatyak-
3.2.3 kmyaty c-yatti kmyatyacy khyta-candrik
3.2.5 kyai ca kvipi ca yau-lope sya ca
3.2.5 kyay ojo-psarasor sa ojo-psarasor khyta-candrik
3.2.9 lohityate lohiyyate 3.2.5
khyta-candrik
3.2.11 bpoma vpoma 3.1.3
khyta-candrik
3.2.11 bpyate vpyate 3.2.10
3.2.16 pauna-punye pona punye khyta-candrik
3.2.17 lupder lapder 3.2.15
khyta-candrik
3.2.19 tatrohyam tatrhyam 3.2.18
khyta-candrik
3.2.19 i-antc in-antc 3.2.19
3.2.20 bau vau khyta-candrik
3.2.20 kepayatty kemayatty 3.2.21
3.3.4 abde aitye khyta-candrik
3.3.7 kauilye koilye 3.3.10
khyta-candrik
3.3.8 viarae visarae 3.3.33
khyta-candrik
3.3.8 dndnayayor dna-dayayor 3.3.42
khyta-candrik
3.3.14 ksate kate 3.3.65
khyta-candrik
3.3.15 madaty madayaty 3.3.87
3.3.15 glepane glapane
after
138
3.3.2 bhv-di bhv-di See footnote
0 khyta-candrik
3.3.23 raddadhty raddhadhty 3.3.161
139
3.3.31 ury-urary- uryy-urary-urarbhya See footnote
3.3.36 atha
rarbhya atra

138
khyta-candrik 3.3.1 says bhv-di. Although bhv-di is a correct form, we changed it to bhv-di
in consideration of BBT standards. Some say that the word bhv-di can lead to confusion since it can
mean bh-v-di.
139
khyta-candrik (3.3.204) has the reading ry-urary-rarbhya.
3.4.5 mtrae mrtrae
3.4.7 prabhty-aivarya- prabhtaivarya-